Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

schedules. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. review the Revit Architecture templates. and plans. every drawing sheet.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. drawing sheets. click Training Files. scope. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. If you move the partition. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. In this case. the hierarchy of elements. 12 Select DefaultMetric. and residential. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and phases when you need it. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. In this case. the door retains this relationship to the partition. the parameter is one of association or connection. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. As you work in drawing and schedule views. In the Revit Architecture model. the floor or roof remains connected. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. Understanding the Basics In this lesson.rte. If the length of the elevation is changed. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. 2D and 3D view. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. how to navigate the user interface. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. 13 Click OK. the operation of the software is parametric. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. and schedules required for a building project. you will use the default template. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. hence. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. and customize the project as necessary. quantities. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. drawings. For most tutorial projects. sections. construction. and open Metric\Templates. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. and click Open. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. You learn the terminology. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design.

They display in relevant views of the model. and keynotes are annotation elements. and 2D detail components. For example. Datum elements help to define project context. For example. Examples include detail lines. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. and reference planes are datum elements. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. dimensions. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. doors. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed.When you change something. walls and roofs are hosts. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. walls. windows. They help to describe or document the model. windows. For example. programming is not required. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. tags. tags. dimensions. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. filled regions. and cabinets are model components. If you can draw. For example. doors. Understanding the Basics | 7 . For example. and roofs are model elements. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. levels. grids. For example. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper.

you can explicitly control them. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . you must be in a section or elevation view.In Revit Architecture. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. top of wall. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. Often. such as roofs. However. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. elevation views. The project file contains all information for the building design. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. In other cases. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. schedules. By using a single project file. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. and drawings of the design. first floor. families. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. section views. for example. Most often. and types. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. for example. Project: In Revit Architecture. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. or bottom of foundation. This information includes components used to design the model. you do nothing to establish these relationships. from geometry to construction data. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. To place levels. floors. and ceilings. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. views of the project. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. and so forth).

and similar graphical representation. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. A type can also be a style. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. System families can be transferred between projects. For example. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. the user interface is labeled. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. In the following illustration. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Navigating the User Interface | 9 . you can create different types of walls with different compositions. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. identical use. A type can be a specific size of a family. In the steps that follow. System families include walls. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. categories of model elements include walls and beams. However. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. For example. roofs. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. ceilings. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. and levels. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. making it easy to understand what each button represents. For example. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. dimensions. floors.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. specifically its clear user interface. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials.

TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. click (New). By default.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. In addition. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. This creates a new project based on the default template. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. While working in the drawing area. which are listed on the menu. you type the required key combination to perform the command. and View. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. For example. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. Edit. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options.

when you add a door. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. When you select the Door tool. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. 9 In the Type Selector. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. For example. On the left side of the Options Bar. a door type is specified.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project.

containing buttons grouped by function. In the drawing area. immediately below the Type Selector. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface.

In the Project Browser. select Views (all). The respective commands display on the Design Bar. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction .11 Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. click the tab in the Design Bar. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser.

The browser is dockable. families. To open a view. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. sheets. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. windows). ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. elevations. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. schedules. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . and groups. families. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. double-click its name. reports. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. walls. family category (doors. and rename views. and group name. 3D). delete. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name.

" TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. Do not click. In the bottom left corner of the window. click Cancel. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. click Wall. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. In this case. After creating a browser organization scheme. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. The cursor displays as a pencil.

Tooltips: To see tooltips. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. After you are familiar with these tasks. Windows: From any window. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. Click the Help button. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. When you place the cursor over an element. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. press F1 for help. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. click on the Standard toolbar. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). in conjunction with tooltips. You can use this tri-pane. In addition. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. The status bar also provides information. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. 20 Press TAB. regarding selected elements in a view. press F1 for context-sensitive help. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. Toolbar: From the toolbar. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. You can also press SHIFT+F1. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. find a keyword on the Index tab. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . There are several tools that help you find information. If no Help button displays.18 On the Design Bar. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. In the status bar. It highlights when the cursor is over it. click Modify to end the Wall command.

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. For example. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. 5 On the View toolbar.rvt. There are several ways to access zoom options. the view zooms out from the building model. click Training Files. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. In the following steps.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . In the drawing area.

SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. When you release the mouse button. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. NOTE As you zoom in and out. on the View toolbar. the view zooms in on the selected area. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. To modify or add snap increments. . As you move the mouse.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 10 To display SteeringWheels. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. If you do not have a wheel mouse. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. 7 Click in the drawing area.

called drag controls. Similar controls. bottoms. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. press ESC. expand Views (all). Small blue dots. moving the wheel to the desired location. click Settings menu ➤ Options. and double-click 2nd Flr. and then using the Zoom tool again. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. 15 To exit the wheel. and click Help.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. For more information about SteeringWheels. referred to as shape handles. expand Floor Plans. 17 Type ZR. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . as shown. Cnst. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. and select the wall. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. and click the SteeringWheels tab. These are the drag controls. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. display along the ends. To define settings for SteeringWheels. When drawing or modifying a building model. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in.

as shown. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. 23 Click next to the lower wall. to lengthen the wall. In this case. The table moves down. and on the Tools toolbar. for example. you want to move the table closer to the wall.18 Click and drag the left control. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. After selecting the element to move. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . click to specify the starting position. Some commands. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. such as Move and Copy. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. and click again to specify the ending position. click (Move). require 2 clicks to complete the command. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table.

and click again to end it. click Lines. In this example. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. click the Undo command. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 26 On the Undo menu. or press CTRL+Z. such as the Lines command. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. on the Standard toolbar. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Move. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. and drag it on top of the table. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . select the second item in the list. Some commands.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 24 Select the plant. The table and plant are returned to their original locations.

30 Close the file without saving your changes. On the Design Bar. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . click Modify. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command.29 To end the command. Press ESC twice.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. this tutorial uses imperial units only.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. When you have finished these tutorials. illustrating how building components work together. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. In this tutorial. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. Use detail components to define an assembly. but for training purposes. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. 27 . you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. or referenced as a drafting view. and annotate building assemblies. In Revit Architecture. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. detail.

and reference a drafting view. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. for Name. enter Window Head Detail. click Drafting View. scroll until the folder is displayed. click Training Files. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. import a DWG detail. 3 In the Scale list. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. If necessary. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. create a reference callout.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. you will create a drafting view.

expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail.). and click Open. The drawing area is still blank. select Black and White. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. displaying the extents of the detail. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. as shown. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. The model zooms out. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . click Training Files. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. located directly to the left of the drawing area. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information.dwg.In the Project Browser. 6 In the Colors field list. 9 Type ZR. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. 10 In the drawing area.

14 In the drawing area. 13 Click Reference other view. to activate the view selection list. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select Detail View: Detail. in the Type Selector. and in the Scale list. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. click Callout. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. 12 On the Options Bar.The view displays to the specified area.

2 On the Options Bar. and in the Scale list. in the Type Selector. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. c_express_workshop_details_start. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown.The reference callout is created. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. 3 In the drawing area. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. double-click the reference callout tag head. select Detail View: Detail. select Callout. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. adjust the detail view display settings.

and click OK. and click Rename. click Modify to clear the selection. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. double-click Wall Base 1. 5 In the Rename View dialog. 4 Right-click Detail 0. for Name. 6 In the drawing area. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. enter Wall Base 1. under Detail Views (Detail). 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. under Detail Views(Detail).

Model-Based Detailing | 33 .The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. bordered by a solid line. This is the view crop region.

click (Hide Crop Region). under Graphics. right-click. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. 14 In the drawing area. 16 Click OK. and click View Properties. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click OK. 13 On the View Control Bar.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. select As Underlay. for Display Model.

20 In the drawing area. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. typical details can easily be placed. Stud. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . 19 In the Type Selector. type 1' 6''.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. If the crop region is enlarged. click Detail Components. 17 On the View Control Bar. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. By grouping detail components. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . verify that the view detail level is set to Medium.Brick on Mtl. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. and press ENTER. Directly above the drawing area.

23 Using the same method. and click Create Instance. as shown. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. 25 In the Project Browser. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . add the following detail components as shown. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command.

29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 . ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation.4" Slab detail. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously.28 Press ESC to end the command.

and format keynote styles. click Training Files. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. or instructions within a construction documentation package.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. and under Keynote Table. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. In the next exercise. For more information about customizing a keynote database. for Full Path. click Keynote ➤ Element. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. Leader. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. map keynotes by material. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Browse. special notes. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . c_express_workshop_details_start. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. and Free End are selected. You can customize this list. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. consistent means of identifying building assembly components.txt. and verify that Horizontal. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. in the type selector.rvt. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. 4 On the Options Bar.

5 In the drawing area.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. Keynoting | 39 . or increase the size of the annotation crop region. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . 7 Click to place the leader arm. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. a question mark displays. 8 Click to place the tag. Either move the text inside. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. If no value has been specified. 9 Press ESC to end the command.

A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. and click OK. 15 Select 07 21 00. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. 13 Click to place the tag. You will now change all keynotes to keys only.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 In the drawing area. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. 12 Click to place the leader arm. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. click Keynote ➤ Material.

17 On the Options Bar. Click Check None. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Select Keynote Tags. Creating Details with Revit Architecture.All items within the selection display in red. legends. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. 19 In the Type Selector.Boxed. Only the keynotes remain selected. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . Click OK.

but for training purposes. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. In this exercise. you will create a sheet. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Place views on drawing sheets. this tutorial uses imperial units only. In this lesson. update the project information element properties. and modify and update the project sheet title block.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. Update drawing sheet and project information. Add labels to a title block. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets.

click Training Files. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. 3 Click OK. If necessary. scroll until the folder is displayed. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. or in the element properties of the title block. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. In Revit Architecture. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). In the left pane of the Open dialog.

NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. 8 On the Design Bar. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. enter A602. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 6 In the Title Block. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. To pan. To zoom in and out. Then. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. click Modify to clear the selection. right-click A602 . double-click Checker. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. For Name. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. In this tutorial. and click Rename. 5 In the drawing area. you can enter ZE to zoom out. 9 In the Project Browser. under Sheets(all).4 Type ZR. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. Smith and press ENTER. roll the wheel. enter Sections/Details. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. hold down the wheel and drag.Unnamed. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. Click OK. 7 Enter K.

displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. 17 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Options Bar. 16 Type ZR. select Text : 1/8''. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. enter Design Development. in the Type Selector. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. (Left) is selected. For Project Status.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 13 Click OK. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. 18 On the Options Bar. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. The Family Editor opens. click Text. enter Freighthouse Flats. enter 4/10/2008. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . For Client Name. enter J. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. For Project Name. select the title block. Smith. 20 Click and type Project Status.

27 Select Wrap between parameters only. as shown. as shown. add Project Issue Date parameter. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. in the Type Selector. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. 29 On the Design Bar. and verify that (Top) are selected. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. click Modify to exit the command. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. click (Load into Project). 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. and click. under Category Parameters. click Label. to add 28 Using the same method. 23 On the Design Bar.21 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select Label : 3/16''. 22 Using the same method.

Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and under Keynote Table. for Full Path.txt. click Browse. place and modify a keynote legend. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. for Name. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. select Override parameter values of existing types. and click Yes. Next you will create. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . In this exercise. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. to a drawing sheet.Project. enter Keynote Legend . a viewport displays. representing the view or schedule.30 In the Reload Family dialog. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. you will create. click Training Files.

TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text.Sections/Details. under Text. 8 In the Project Browser. and drag Keynote Legend . 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . under Sheets (all). The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. clear Show Headers. double-click A601 . 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. on the Appearance tab. expand Legends. as shown.

Project as shown. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. The keynote legend is visible. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown.9 Press ESC to clear the selection. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . and zoom in on the Keynote Legend .

for View Name. expand Detail Views (Detail). Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. select Filter by sheet.Sheet. and click OK. as shown.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 19 Click OK twice. enter Keynote Legend .Project. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. 15 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. at the bottom of the Filter tab. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. under Legends. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. right-click Keynote Legend . not keynotes. for Filter. click Edit. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. The Keynote Legend is now blank. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. as shown. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . under Sheets (all).Title Sheet 1. The view remains selected. The view title with line displays below the viewport. double-click A0 . and then add and update a Drawing list. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet.The keynote legend is automatically updated. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. 2 In the Project Browser. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser.

and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. The drawing list remains selected. 6 Type ZR. or omit view titles from sheets. You can specify text attributes for view titles. and zoom in on the drawing list. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. as shown. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. 5 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. define the information to include in a view title. Revit Architecture displays a view title. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. As part of a construction document set. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. by default. Press ESC to clear the selection. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list.When you place a view on a sheet. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. 3 In the Type Selector. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture.

and click Properties.Ceiling Plans. including only sheets that contain views. select A602 . 9 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Appears In Drawing List. 8 In the Project Browser. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . under Sheets (all). while pressing SHIFT. under Identity Data.Sections/Details and select A801 . You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. and click OK.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. The drawing list display is updated. right-click the selected sheets.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

As you develop the building design.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. If the grid moves. a curtain wall. it is good practice to test the constraints. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. 57 . and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. the wall or column will move with it. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. After the beginning exercises. a central service core. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. For example. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development.

South. To create the project file. but contains no geometry. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. The new project opens. you load any required family type that is not in your project. from the product library. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. with an RVT extension. notice four elevation markers. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. In the drawing area in the right pane. click Training Files. In views that display elevation markers. and settings. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises.rte. construction. select Project. you design inside the elevation markers. Creating the Project In this exercise. such as a door or window. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. under Projects. For this project. and customize the project as necessary.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. verify that the second option is selected. and click Browse. West. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. levels. locate the Project Browser. 5 Click OK. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. click New. East. views. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you will use the default template. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. and residential. The project is stored as a single file. 2 In the New Project dialog. In practice. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. under Create new. 3 Under Template file. you use a template that is provided with the software.

and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. Schedules/Quantities. Creating the Project | 59 . display in the south elevation. 14 For File name. These views are customizable: you can rename them. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. and other properties. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. As you design and document your building model. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. Families. schedules. duplicate them. 8 Under Floor Plans. and elevation views created in the project by the template.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current.rvt) is selected. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. NOTE If you create a project without a template. 10 In the Project Browser. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. view the Save reminder interval. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. 16 Click Save. content and building model reports. You can add. sheets. will be accessible from the Project Browser. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). you will want to save your work frequently. and duplicate levels. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. created by the template. as well as change their names. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. Two level lines. 15 For Save as type. double-click Metric. double-click South. and on the General tab. and click Training Files. Groups. Ceiling Plans. reflected ceiling plan views. 7 If necessary. change their properties. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and Elevations (Building Elevation). The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. the view you see in the drawing area. expand Views (all). and delete them. heights. verify that Project Files (*. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. such as schedules and legends. enter Revit Retail Building.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. then expand Floor Plans. and families in your project. notice the Legends. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. 13 In the file window. Sheets (all). delete.

2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . or constrained. the other levels move and change with it. and press ENTER. When you begin designing. and windows within the building model. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). so that when one level moves. to each other. doors. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. You change the names of the 2 default levels. expand Views (all). you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques.17 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. After you modify the two default levels. You learn how the levels are locked. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. Adding Project Levels on page 60. and double-click South. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. enter 00 Foundation.

a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. enter -1800.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. click Level. enter 01 Entry Level. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. If it does not. Next. When you add the new level. and press ENTER. view the Design Bar. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. 14 Click Plan View Types. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. right-click. and click OK. 16 Enter 3750. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. By default. not all the tabs are visible. enter 0. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. As you move the cursor. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. Adding Project Levels | 61 . (You do not have to click to specify the start point. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. and press ENTER. and then move it up. 13 On the Options Bar. and press ESC. which should display by default. 5 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. and click Basics.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. This is the Options Bar. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line.

27 Rename the level 03 Level. enter 3750. click (Pick Lines). you add another level. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. or on the Design Bar. right-click Level 3. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. click Level. using a different option. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. 25 Click to place the level line. 26 Press ESC. and move it slightly upward. and for Offset. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. 19 Click OK. click Modify to end the command. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. and enter 02 Level. 23 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Project Browser.18 In the Project Browser. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. click Rename. Next. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. If you create a level by copying it. and rename the corresponding views. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. under Floor Plans.

Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. If you select a level and click its lock. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. all the levels move. and you can move them independently. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. the levels are no longer constrained. Adding Project Levels | 63 . as shown. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. Notice that by moving the top level.

Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. under Floor Plans. Move the cursor up. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. In the following exercise. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. double-click 00 Foundation. so that if the roof elevation changes. In a later exercise. click Modify. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. specify a start point for the grid line. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. On the Design Bar. click Grid. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. the column height changes as well. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . When the grid is complete. select (Draw). you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. and specify the grid line endpoint.

and click to place the line. On the Options Bar. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. click (Pick Lines). for Offset. Click to place the grid line. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. for Offset. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . and click to place the line. and press ENTER. On the Options Bar. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and for Offset. and click to place the line. click Grid. enter 7500 mm. Enter A. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. Next. enter 4500 mm. enter 7500 mm. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar.

and specify the grid line endpoint. as shown. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 11 On the Design Bar. click Grid. On the Options Bar.8 Press ESC. click Grid. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm.

15 Starting with grid line A.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . 21 Press ESC twice. click Dimension. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. 18 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. 22 While pressing CTRL. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. click Dimension. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. click (Aligned). 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. select grid lines C and 3.

click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 For End Segments Length. click Modify. By pinning these central grid lines. enter 50mm. 24 Press ESC. click and drag the blue circular grip up. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. The pins are hidden. click Edit/New. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. and on the Options Bar. 26 In the drawing area. (Element Properties). and click OK. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. 29 In the Name dialog. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. select grid line 5. click . At the left endpoint of the grid line. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. enter 6. and select grid line A. 32 Click OK twice. and select None. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. until it is closer to grid line A. If necessary. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. click Modify. until it is closer to grid line 5.5mm Bubble with Gap. click the value for Center Segment. Two pins display on the grid lines. and press ESC. 28 In the Type Properties dialog.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. and press ESC. 33 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right.

5mm Bubble. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . and in the Type Selector. click Finish. select Grid : 6. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. For Place By. 39 In the Type Selector. click Structural Column. and on the Options Bar. click (Grid Intersection).5mm Bubble with Gap. The original continuous grid lines are restored. click Modify. and press ESC. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. 35 In the Type Selector. 36 On the Design Bar. 37 Select the grid lines again. select Grid : 6. select all of the grid lines.

49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. double-click 01 Entry Level. select 01 Entry Level. Next. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. click Camera. 43 Press ESC. 48 On the Standard toolbar. select grid line A. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Activate Dimensions. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. 46 On the Options Bar. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. If it is unlocked. under Floor Plans. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. lock it. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. and unlock it. 47 Enter 9000. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. for From. and press ENTER. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. 45 While pressing CTRL.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 52 On the Options Bar.

The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. Creating a Column Grid | 71 . and click to place the target point of the camera.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A.

enter To Building. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. and click OK. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. expand 3D Views. and then copy them to subsequent levels. Right-click 3D View 1. and click Rename. In the Rename View dialog. Adding Beams on page 72. displays in bold under 3D Views. under Views (all). Adding Beams In this exercise. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. When you finish adding beams. named 3D View 1 by default. The current view.

select each grid line. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. 10 In the Project Browser. click Beam. 8 While pressing CTRL. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. click (Create Beam On Grid). double-click To Building to view all of the beams.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. The selected grid lines display as red. 6 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 4 Click Medium. under 3D Views. Adding Beams | 73 . 3 Click the Detail Level icon . The view is currently set to Coarse. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. the icon on the right side of the scale. double-click 01 Entry Level. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. view the icons on the View Control Bar. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. 7 On the Options Bar. click Finish.

click (Default 3D View). Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. under Floor Plans. select 06 Roof. and click OK. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. and click Select All Instances. double-click 01 Entry Level. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. 14 Select one of the beams. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. 13 On the Design Bar. press and hold SHIFT. right-click. select 02 Level. 12 On the View toolbar. click Modify.

for Top Level. 20 Click Cancel. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. and click Element Properties.to the 5th level. and click Select All Instances. right-click. under 3D Views. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. select 06 Roof. double-click To Building. and click OK. resize the view to see the entire structure. under Instance Parameters. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. 21 With the column selected. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 06 Roof. All of the columns display as red. under Constraints. and if necessary. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. When you created the columns. Adding Beams | 75 . 22 On the Options Bar. (Element Properties). 25 In the Project Browser. view the Top Level parameter. click 24 Press ESC. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level.

You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. 28 Save the drawing.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. double-click South. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. under Elevations. but you want to display them in less detail. as lines only.

verify that Attach to Grid is selected. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Adding Braces | 77 . click Framing Elevation. and press ESC to end the command. To better add the braces to the structure. under Floor Plans. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. you create 8 framing elevation views. double-click 00 Foundation. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. Adding Braces on page 77.29 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Braces In this exercise. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown.

9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. click Brace. and when the endpoint snap displays. 8 In the Type Selector. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. press ESC twice. 11 Using the same technique. After you add the final brace. double-click the elevation marker arrow. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). NOTE Do not copy or array braces. 7 On the Design Bar. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. but when placed the braces are placed. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. click to specify the start point of the brace. The associated framing elevation view displays.

Adding Braces | 79 . IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. and press ENTER. enter 18000 mm. The height of the roof lowers. delete it and redraw it.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams.

14 On the Standard toolbar. and press ENTER. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. but this time add them from right to left. enter 10000 mm. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights.13 Double-click the 04 Level height.

Adding Braces | 81 . and press ENTER. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. and on the Options Bar. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. NOTE As you add braces. click Activate Dimensions. double-click 00 Foundation. 21 Select grid line A. 19 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Project Browser. enter 12000 mm. as shown in the 3D view below. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). under Floor Plans.

Test connectivity of the columns. double-click South. and drag it away from the structure. lock it. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. 31 Save the drawing. grid size. under Elevations. Creating a Foundation on page 82. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. under 3D Views. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. 28 On the Standard toolbar. under Floor Plans. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. double-click 00 Foundation. 26 In the Project Browser. click and roof height. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click {3D}. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. 29 In the Project Browser.24 In the Project Browser. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and if necessary. beams.

Before you can add the pile caps. for Level. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. and click View Properties. and how to load specific families into a project. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. 9 Close the warning dialog. Click OK twice. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. under Extents. expand Families. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and press ESC twice. click Training Files. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. select Unlimited. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. under Floor Plans. under View Depth. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. After you load the pile cap family. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. and drag it to the drawing area. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. The foundation pile cap now displays. and expand Structural Foundations. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid.rfa. In the View Range dialog. The pile cap has been added in the view. A warning displays. In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. for View Range. double-click 00 Foundation. Creating a Foundation | 83 .

12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. 13 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Create Similar.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. When the final pile cap is placed. press ESC twice.

2 Select one of the columns. All columns in the building model display as red. and click Select All Instances. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. click Training Files. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. You load new column. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. you change the types of the columns. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure.rvt. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. and brace families into the project. under 3D Views. beam.14 Close the file with or without saving it. double-click {3D}. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. and braces that you used to create the building structure. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. beams. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 .

and click Select All Instances. for Type. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only.3 In the Type Selector. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. and click OK.6X15. This not the size that you want to use. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 16 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. right-click. 7 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Name dialog. 6 In the Type Selector. for d. click Edit/New. enter 75mm. enter 75mm. 15 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. click Brace. but it is the only size of its type currently available. click (Default 3D View). 9 In the Type Selector. double-click Elevation 1-a. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. under Dimensions. click Modify. In the following steps. click Modify. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. the braces as well as the beams change. 18 In the Type Selector. click (Element Properties). You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. The brace type changes. 10 On the Options Bar. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. 17 While pressing CTRL. 19 On the Design Bar.5CHS. select the braces in the elevation one by one. you change the brace type. The building model displays the round hollow columns. click Modify. 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice.9. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203.2X101. and changing its size parameter. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model.

22 Proceed to the next exercise. Linking the Structural Model on page 87. and click Open. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural. After the files are linked.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. 3 Under Positioning. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. click Training Files.Origin to Origin. select m_RRB_structure_complete.rvt. select Auto .rvt. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. Linking the Structural Model | 87 .

The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. under Elevations. click (Copy/Monitor).4 In the Project Browser. double-click South. select the linked Revit model. In this case. however. depending on the project. select Levels 00 through 06. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. and click Select Link. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . structural members. After the link is established. while pressing CTRL. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. 5 On the Tools toolbar. click Copy. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. Grids. 8 On the Options Bar. 9 In the drawing area. and walls could also be copy/monitored. select Multiple. 6 In the drawing area.

10 On the Options Bar. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. 15 In the New Plan dialog. 16 Click OK. right-click Level 1. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . under Floor Plans. 18 Using the same method. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). First. click OK. while pressing SHIFT. delete the Level 2 floor plan. click Finish. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. for Floor Plan views. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. click Finish mode. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and click Delete. 13 On the Design Bar.

for Name. 25 In the View Templates dialog. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. double-click 01 Entry Level.19 In the Project Browser. 21 In the drawing area. select the Topography : Surface. under Floor Plans. 24 In the New View Template dialog. click OK. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. right-click. enter Floor Plans. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 26 In the Project Browser. right-click. 20 In the drawing area. and click OK. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

under Names. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. select Floor Plans.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . double-click Site. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. and click OK. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. click Camera. under Floor Plans. 34 In the 3D view that displays. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid.

click Training Files. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. and railings are also created from sketches. expand 3D Views. Adding Floors In this exercise. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. 36 In the Rename View dialog. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors.35 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. stairs. Adding Floors on page 92. right-click 3D View 1. To create floors. and click OK. enter To Building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Some other Revit Architecture elements.rvt. such as roofs. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Rename. 37 Proceed to the next exercise.

Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. click Lines. Leave this dimension unlocked. click Dimension. Adding Floors | 93 . On the Sketch tab. You are now in the Sketch Editor. and then the first horizontal grid line. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. At the top left corner of the grid. double-click 01 Entry Level. If the grid changes size. click (Rectangle). Move the cursor to the left. click Floor. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. select the top floor line. under Floor Plans. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. Do not lock the dimension. and elements in the current view display as gray. past the first vertical grid line.

At the top left corner of the grid. Do not lock the dimensions. Move the cursor to the left dimension. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. select the top floor line.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. ■ 7 On the Design Bar. and change their values to 300 mm. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. click Modify. Select and lock the dimensions. They display on the floor sketch. and then press ESC. Enter 300. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. press ENTER. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click the temporary dimension value.

The 02 Level floor sketch displays. and lock the dimensions. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. and on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. Adding Floors | 95 . click Edit. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser.8 Select the floor. On the Sketch tab. double-click 02 Level. click Quit Sketch. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click (Pick Lines). Next. enter 1500mm. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. On the Options Bar. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. click Floor. and press ESC. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. click Lines. and for Offset. Select the three remaining floor lines. on the Design Bar. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. using a different sketching technique.

The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. 16 On the Design Bar. click (Align). dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. double-click 03 Level. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. 14 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click (Rectangle). and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. 17 On the Sketch tab. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. and a lock icon displays. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. 18 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. The 02 Level floor displays. click Floor. 20 On the Tools toolbar. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. Click the locks to constrain the floors.

25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. 35 On the Sketch tab. click Finish Sketch. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. 31 In the Project Browser. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. select 05 Roof Garden. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. 32 Select the floor. click Finish Sketch. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. double-click {3D}. Alternatively.24 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. Adding Floors | 97 . dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. and lock the edges. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Edit. under Floor Plans. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. under Views ➤ 3D Views. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. double-click 05 Roof Garden.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Lines. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Click (Pick Lines).rvt. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. and press ENTER. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. When a blue dashed line displays. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Adding a Roof on page 98. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. double-click 06 Roof. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click to place the roof line. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. Adding a Roof In this exercise. under Floor Plans. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. 3 On the Design Bar. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . To create the roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. ■ ■ For Offset. enter 1800 mm. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser.

8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). click to place the roof line. Adding a Roof | 99 . move the cursor slightly below the grid line. and when the blue dashed line displays.6 Select grid line 5. for Offset. 7 On the Options Bar. enter 300 mm.

11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar.10 Press ESC. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. click Finish Roof. ■ 12 On the Design Bar. select the roof. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). click (Trim/Extend). Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown.

for Elevation. and press ENTER. enter -100 mm.14 On the Options Bar. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Section. on grid D. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. Adding a Roof | 101 . 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. move the cursor down below the roof. click (Add new points to the slab shape). 15 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the section.

The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 Click OK 3 times. select the roof. click Edit. and on the Options Bar. click Edit/New. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. In section. under Construction. for Structure [1]. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. 24 In the Project Browser. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog.20 On the Design Bar. select Variable. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). double-click 06 Roof. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. for Structure. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. (Element Properties). 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.

the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. click Modify. on the View Control Bar. 37 If necessary. zoom in to the roof.Roof Edge. 41 Starting with the left front edge. 38 In the 3D view. and press DELETE. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. In this case. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. Adding a Roof | 103 . select Fascia : Fascia . Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. 40 In the Type Selector. select each edge. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. moving counter-clockwise. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. click (Default 3D View). Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. 33 In the warning dialog. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select the section line. click OK.31 On the Design Bar.

so if you resize the grid. you add a curtain wall. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. the curtain wall resizes with it. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. under 3D Views. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .42 On the Design Bar. double-click To Building. click Modify. 44 Proceed to the next exercise.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Offset. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern.rvt. and move it slightly toward the building interior. click Training Files. and click OK. for Join Condition. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The type is saved in the project. under Floor Plans. For Height. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. for Spacing. for Spacing. 3 In the Type Selector. click to place the first curtain wall segment. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). 10 When a blue dashed line displays. enter 2100 mm. click Duplicate. select 05 Roof Garden. select 01 Entry Level. When you duplicate a type. enter Retail Storefront. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. for Type. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. click Wall. Click OK twice. For Level.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter 1050 mm. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. click 01 Entry Level. Under Construction. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. 6 In the Name dialog. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 600 mm.

verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Dimension. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. and lock the dimensions. double-click To Building. you can delete the dimensions. under 3D Views. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. and trim each curtain wall segment. so they remain in the view. If you want to hide them.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. click (Trim/Extend). 13 On the Design Bar. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 15 On the View Control Bar. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. These dimensions are not in a sketch. If the grid moves. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar.

Creating an Entrance | 107 . click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating an Entrance on page 107. Creating an Entrance In this exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall.

select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. under the element list. 5 Under Visibility. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. All the elements in the list are selected. 4 On the Model Categories tab. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. as these usually represent internal pilasters. click All. and click None. under Views (all). click Detail Level ➤ Medium. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. 6 Under Visibility. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . To better work with the curtain wall panels. clear one element to clear all the elements.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View Control Bar. and double-click South. Do not select Columns. 7 Click OK.

15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. click Modify. in this case an architectural elevation. 16 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. select Architectural Elevation. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. 12 With the panels selected. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 18 On the View Control Bar.9 On the Design Bar. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. double-click {3D}. in the Type Selector. 17 In the Project Browser. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. Creating an Entrance | 109 . and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. select System Panel : Solid. press and hold CTRL. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. under 3D Views. 10 Select 1 panel. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template.

double-click To Building. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 20 In the Project Browser.19 In the Project Browser. 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. double-click South. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. under 3D Views.

27 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating an Entrance | 111 . 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. click Curtain Grid. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. click Add or Remove Segments. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. 30 On the Design Bar. select another mullion to the right. select One Segment. and click to select it. 32 In the Type Selector. and unpin it.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line.

and view the new entrance. press TAB until it is selected. 34 On the View toolbar. select it. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. click (Default 3D View). and unpin it. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 36 Zoom in to the first panel. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. 40 Optionally. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. and 4th panels. 3rd. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. remove the mullions from the 2nd. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. open the North elevation. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . 39 Using the same process.38 Press DELETE. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building.

for Underlay. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Graphics. click Training Files. 3 Right-click in the view. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling.rvt. select 02 Level. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and click View Properties. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click 01 Entry Level. 5 Click OK.

enter Display Area. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . 10 In the Rename View dialog. The cursor changes to a pencil. which indicates you must draw the callout. and click to complete the callout. and click OK. click Callout. under Floor Plans. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. select the grip closest to the callout head. and click Rename. 9 In the Project Browser. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select the callout.

click Section. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. 14 Press ESC. 12 Draw a section line. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 16 Select the section box. as shown. 13 Select the section line. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. right-click.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Flip Section.

25 Press ESC twice. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Dimension. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. under Floor Plans.135mm Partition (2-hr). 24 On the Tools toolbar.17 In the Project Browser. Lock both alignments. 21 In the Type Selector. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. for Prefer. select Wall faces. Click (Rectangle). select Basic Wall : Interior . For Loc Line. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . and click OK. 18 In the Rename View dialog. click (Align). ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. expand Sections (Building Section). 26 On the Design Bar. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. 27 On the Options Bar. and click Rename. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). enter Section Display Area. select Finish Face: Exterior. click Wall. right-click Section 1.

31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and lock the dimension.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 38 On the View Control Bar. 37 In the Project Browser.) 36 Press ESC twice. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. under Ceiling Plans. click Ceiling. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. under Sections (Building Section). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. double-click Section Display Area. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. and lock the dimension. double-click 01 Entry Level. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. 32 In the Type Selector. Next. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space.

under Constraints. enter 2700 mm. for Top/Base. and click OK. press TAB until you select the wall chain. 43 On the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). and click to select the walls. 46 Press ESC. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. under Constraints. and press ESC. click to select it. double-click Section Display Area. under Ceiling Plans. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. and click to select the walls. click (Element Properties). 47 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . for Height Offset From Level. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. under Sections.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 On the Options Bar. enter 2700 mm. Select the 02 Level Floor. and click OK. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. On the Options Bar. click Attach. click Modify. for Base Offset.

click Edit. under Ceiling Plans. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. click Cancel. double-click 01 Entry Level. 58 On the Edit toolbar. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. for Structure. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. for Type. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. click Edit/New.49 In the Project Browser. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. click Cancel. 54 Click OK. click (Rotate). 52 In the Type Properties dialog. and click . 55 In the Type Properties dialog. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Construction. view the ceiling structure. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog.

enter 45.60 Click. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . 61 Press ESC. 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. and press ENTER.

View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 66 Optionally. under 3D Views. double-click To Building. click Shadows On. click Shadows Off. 65 On the View Control Bar. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. 64 On the View Control Bar. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123.

Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. and for Offset. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. and click to create a reference plane to the left. and click to create a reference plane to the right. enter 1500 mm. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Ref Plane.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. Move the cursor over grid line B. click Training Files. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. and copy it to the 05 Level. double-click 01 Entry Level.

You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. 6 Select the left reference plane. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. and 3. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. C. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and specify a point to create first stair flight. shorten the right reference plane. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 7 Using the same method. click Stairs. click Modify.5 On the Design Bar. 2.

select Finish Face: Interior. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. and select the 2nd reference plane. 10 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor down. Click (Rectangle). select Basic Wall : Generic .■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. click Wall. The complete stair displays. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . including its handrails.225mm Masonry. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. 12 In the Type Selector. ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. beyond the end of the stair. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. and specify a point.

press TAB until the stair edge is selected. click Dimension. Lock the dimension. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. click Align. and click to select it. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. select the dimension value. Select the bottom of the stair. for Prefer. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. and specify a point away from the wall. select Wall faces. enter 1200 mm. and press ENTER. Click Modify. and lock the alignment. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select the interior face of the wall. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 18 Using the same technique.15 On the Tools toolbar. Select the wall.

TIP To flip the door swing. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. and press DELETE. a warning displays. 24 On the Standard toolbar. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. 28 On the Options Bar.21 Select the dimension. click Door. clear Tag on Placement. 25 While pressing CTRL. Because the dimension is constrained. and press DELETE. select both reference planes. (Undo). click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. The stair and walls move to the left. 23 Select the stair. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . 27 In the Type Selector.

and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. (Element Properties). 44 On the Tools toolbar. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. Under Constraints. under Floor Plans. click 36 On the View toolbar. select all 4 walls. click Align. (SteeringWheels). select 05 Roof Garden. (Default 3D View). for Base Constraint. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). For Top Constraint. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. and move the cursor to spin the building model. Click OK. 35 On the View toolbar. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. 33 Select the stair. (Rectangle).30 On the Design Bar. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. double-click 01 Entry Level. select 00 Foundation. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). Click OK. click Modify. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. but if you view the top level of the building. for Multistory Top Level. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors.

46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. click see the roof. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. on the View toolbar. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. and lock the alignments. (SteeringWheels). View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . click (Default 3D View). Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. and click OK. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. and lock the alignment.

under Floor Plans. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 01 Entry Level. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. enter 300 mm. For Top Constraint. By offsetting the base. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click 59 On the View toolbar. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. 56 Select the shaft. (Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels). and click OK. for Base Offset. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. Under Constraints. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties).55 In the Project Browser. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level.

and click OK. and click View Properties. click Wall. select 06 Roof. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. click Training Files. double-click 05 Roof Garden.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Right-click in the view. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . for Underlay. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Graphics. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

5 In the Type Selector. enter 9750. click Lines. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select Basic Wall : Generic . click Edit Profile. 15 In the error dialog. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. 16 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Go To View dialog. 7 On the Tools toolbar. click (Align). and on the Options Bar. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. click Remove Constraints. and press ENTER. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. and click Open View. click . and click (Fillet arc). You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. select Elevation: South. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. The exact placement is not important. and then select the right face of the wall.225mm Masonry. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. 17 On the Options Bar.

click Finish Sketch. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . under 3D Views.18 In the upper right corner of the profile. 22 In the Project Browser. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. double-click {3D}. and click (Circle). click .

Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk.

3 In the Type Selector. between grid lines C and D. and press ESC twice. click Component.rvt. TIP After you place the 1st planter. as shown. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. 5 On the Basics tab. click Training Files. 6 In the Type Selector.5 Meters. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. select M_RPC Tree . under Floor Plans. click Component.4. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. double-click 05 Roof Garden.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5.

under Dimensions. 11 Select one of the trees. 21 On the Design Bar. click Floor. under 3D Views.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1.5 Meters. For Offset. enter 1500 mm. View the roof. select the 2 remaining trees. 14 In the Name dialog. click Lines. double-click {3D}. and in the Type Selector. select M_RPC Tree . 13 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click Edit/New. for Type. enter 2400 mm.5 Meters. for Height. 18 In the Project Browser. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Duplicate. enter Japanese Cherry 1. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. double-click 01 Entry Level.8 On the View toolbar. (Element Properties). 10 In the Project Browser. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. click (Default 3D View). click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Click Apply. and on the Options Bar. as shown. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. and then click OK twice. 17 While pressing CTRL. under Floor Plans. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click 05 Roof Garden.

sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. and click to sketch a line. and click to sketch a line. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . 26 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). and click to place the line. 25 Using the same method. enter 0 mm. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. for Offset. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. 29 On the Options Bar.

33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. 35 Select the line that you just drew. click (Trim/Extend). move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. move the cursor up 900 mm. clear Chain. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 34 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5.30 On the Options Bar. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. and click to finish the line. and click to finish the line. 32 Press ESC.

38 On the Design Bar. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 42 In the Name dialog. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. for Height Offset from Level. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. 45 Click OK. enter Sidewalk. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . select M_RPC Male : Alex. under Constraints. for Type. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. In plan view. The completed sidewalk displays. 39 Select the sidewalk. 48 In the Type Selector. select Rotate after placement. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. and click so he is facing the column. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. a photorealistic image displays. Next. and on the Options Bar. 43 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. click Component. enter -250 mm. as shown: (Element Properties). RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. 49 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. near Column E5. When you render an image. click Finish Sketch.

select M_RPC Beetle. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. and click (Element Properties). click the car. click Camera. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 54 In the Type Selector. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. about 30 degrees. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. 56 Press ESC twice. and click to place her on the sidewalk.NOTE If necessary. 52 In the Type Selector. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1).

click Pick Host. click Pick Host. 63 Click the sidewalk. 66 Using the same method. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. 60 In the Project Browser. enter -300 mm. under 3D Views.59 In the Element Properties dialog. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. When you select a host for a component. and on the Options Bar. If the sidewalk changes height. double-click West. under Elevations. under Constraints. double-click To Building. Next. 65 Click the sidewalk. 64 Select Alex. and click OK. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. for Offset. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. and on the Options Bar.

Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. After the service core is positioned. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. and replace them with a service core. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. click (Default 3D View). under Floor Plans. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . double-click 05 Roof Garden. including the stairs. 5 On the View toolbar. click 6 On the View toolbar. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. walls. and shaft opening. (SteeringWheels). In the left pane of the Open dialog. you delete the entire stairwell. 3 Select the entire stairwell. 4 Press DELETE. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building.rvt.

under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_RRB_core.rvt.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. right-click m_RRB_core. and on the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. 14 In the Project Browser. click Modify. double-click 00 Foundation. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. expand Groups. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click OK. under Floor Plans. 13 In the drawing area. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. and zoom in to the linked instance. and click Create Instance. expand Model. and notice that the linked file is listed. 11 In the Project Browser. click (Align). 10 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.

NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. click Modify. click 21 On the View toolbar. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. click (top down view). and on the Options Bar. 18 Select the core. (Default 3D View). 17 On the Design Bar. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . click Ungroup. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. (SteeringWheels). 20 On the View toolbar. or if the group layout is expected to change. click Modify. and click to align the center. 19 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ Click grid line C.

Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Training Files. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. 22 Proceed to the final exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. After you modify it. where it is hosted within a railing family.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. you add glass railings around the floor edges. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_.

Handrail only. expand Families. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. and Parapet.rvt. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. and click to split the floor. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and double-click Lounge Perspective. expand Renderings. and select Glass. double-click 02 Level. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. under Floor Plans. 5 Expand Railing. click (Split). 2 In the left pane of the dialog. 3 In the Conference project. The floor sketch displays. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. 8 In the Project Browser. press and hold CTRL.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. click Edit. click Training Files. and on the Options Bar.rvt. and expand Railings. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click OK. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. The rendering displays. 13 On the Tools toolbar. in the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Conference. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 .

19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. verify that Chain is not selected. and click to place it. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. 25 Select grid line B. 18 On the Design Bar. and click to draw another line. and click to draw another line. and click the lock to lock the alignment. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. 24 On the Tools toolbar. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. click Lines. click Modify. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm.15 On the Design Bar. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. and on the Options Bar. click (Align). 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched.

and lock the alignment. and click the lock to lock the alignment.26 Select grid line D. For Offset. and click OK. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. 27 On the Tools toolbar. 30 On the Design Bar. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Railing. 29 On the Design Bar. enter 100 mm. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. select Glass. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. for Type. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. click Finish Sketch. click (Align). Lock the dimensions. 31 In the Revit dialog. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. click Railing Properties. click Dimension.rvt project. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. 33 On the Design Bar.

click Dimension. 39 Click Finish Sketch. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera.37 On the Design Bar. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . You can view the railing that you just added. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view.

152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .43 Close all project drawings.

you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. slight modifications to the building design have been made. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. lofty ceilings. NOTE For training purposes. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. exterior fire stairs. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. balconies. and a roof garden.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. 153 . BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors.

154 .

and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. 155 . you learn how to create views from a building model. elevation. how to create section and elevation views. You learn how to create new views from existing views. section. including plan.

rvt. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

under Floor Plans. and click OK. and click OK. 9 In the Project Browser. select Level 2. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . under Floor Plans. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename.2 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 7 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser.

11 Under Floor Plans. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 12 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. enter Vicinity Plan.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 13 In the Project Browser. 14 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. and click 1: 1000. click the current scale. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. Next. double-click Vicinity Plan.

15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 16 Right-click. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.rvt.

click Elevation. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. under Floor Plans. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Scale. 3 In the Type Selector. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry.rvt. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. double-click Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar. select 1:100. select Elevation: Building Elevation.

click Modify. click Modify. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. 8 On the Design Bar. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 . and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar.

and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. under Elevations (Building Elevation). ■ Move the cursor down. click Section. 10 In the Rename View dialog. select Section: Building Section. expand Floor Plans. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter South East. for Scale. and click OK. and double-click Level 1. 11 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Type Selector. select 1:100. 15 On the Options Bar. double-click South East. under Elevations.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.

click Split Segment.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. Click the midpoint of the section line. and click to place it. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. using the blue circular drag grip. 24 Select gridline F. 23 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. and double-click Section 1. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.21 On the Design Bar. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. expand Sections (Building Section). Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble.

you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. To create each view. click Modify.25 On the Design Bar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. select Floor Plan.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. for Scale. select 1:50. double-click Level 1.rvt.Resulting callout view . Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. click Callout. Creating Callout Views | 167 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair.

and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. click Modify. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. and select the callout boundary. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. ■ Select the middle grip. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head.

for Scale. 14 On the Options Bar. double-click Section 1. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. select 1:50.7 On the Design Bar. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. click Callout. Creating Callout Views | 169 . 9 In the Rename View dialog. under Sections (Building Sections). The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Type Selector. select Detail View: Detail. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. click Modify. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename.

170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 16 Modify the callout leader as shown.■ Move the cursor diagonally down.

17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. enter Roof Overhang Detail. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Callout Views | 171 . under Detail Views (Details). double-click Roof Overhang Detail. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. expand Detail Views (Details). 18 In the Rename View dialog. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename.

Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise.rfa. the elevation markers. double-click Level 1. and click Open. click Training Files. under Floor Plans. You change the appearance of the section mark head. open Metric\Families\Annotations. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. select Custom-Section Head. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and can be applied to the section line. 12 For Section Tag. and click OK. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. 22 In the Name dialog. for Section Head. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. 10 On the floor plan. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. scroll to Section Line. and select 2.Custom. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 12. and click OK twice. On the floor plan. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select the current project. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. and click OK. 8 In the Name dialog.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. click Load into Project. and select 3. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.5mm Square. select the section line. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. scroll to Section Marks. 15 Under Category.Filled. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. and click OK. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. 4 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. select Section Head . click Duplicate. clear any others. 19 Click OK. click the Annotation Objects tab. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . Section Tail . enter Section Head – Custom. Section Tail – Filled. 17 Under Category. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. .

for Elevation Tag. 34 In the Name dialog. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. . select Custom-Callout Head. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 40 Press ESC.5 mm. and on the Options Bar. select 3. enter 12. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog.rfa. and click OK. . for Callout Tag. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. For Corner Radius. select the callout. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. click Edit/New. Click OK. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. click Training Files. On the floor plan. 27 Click OK twice. and click Open. select 12. and on the Options Bar. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 39 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. and click OK. open Metric\Families\Annotations.23 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. clear all others. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. Click OK. select the current project. 36 In the drawing. click Load into Project. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 6 mm. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. For Dimensions ➤ Width. select Square. For Line Weight. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 38 In the Type Properties dialog. notice the square elevation markers that display.5mm Square. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. 30 On the Design Bar.

Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . and visual overrides. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. and select 4. 45 For Line Pattern. and select 7. You learn to create view templates. 49 Click OK. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. view regions. masking regions. scroll down to Callout Boundary. expand Callout Boundary. 43 Under Category. select Dash. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. filters. 46 Under Category. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. click the Annotation Objects tab. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog.

and features blue triangular grips and break marks. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The crop region displays as red. under Elevations. click (Hide Crop Region). and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. 2 On the View Control Bar. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click (Show Crop Region). you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. To accomplish this. and apply it to multiple elevation views.rvt. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. and double-click East. 6 On the View Toolbar. 5 On the View Control Bar. click Zoom to Fit.Creating a View Template In this exercise. click Training Files. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view.

Callouts. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. clear Entourage. levels. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. under Visibility. 13 On the View Control bar. 11 Under Visibility. Creating a View Template | 177 . elevation markers. grids. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and section lines are now hidden in the view. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On.

rvt. and click OK. click OK. under Elevations. right-click North. right-click East. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. 16 In the View Templates dialog. 15 In the New View Template dialog.14 In the Project Browser. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and click Create View Template From View. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. under Elevations. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. 20 Using the same method. click Apply. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. and click Apply View Template. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 17 In the Project Browser. double-click North. and click OK. edit the crop region as before.

3 In the Element Properties dialog. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. for Bottom. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. and click Properties. select Level Below (Level 4). NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. 2 In the Project Browser. select Penthouse. Click OK twice. click Edit. for Level. Under View Depth. select Level Below (Level 4). and the exterior area on the south side of the building. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Penthouse. under Extents. right-click.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. for View Range.

for View Range. 6 In the Project Browser. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Roof Plan. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK twice. select Level 4. under Extents. for Bottom. and click Properties. click Edit.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. Under View Depth. right-click. select Roof Plan. under Floor Plans. for Level. select Level 4.

under Extents. Click OK twice. Under View Depth. select Unlimited. 16 On the Design Bar. Move you cursor diagonally. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. click Region Properties. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . In the left corner of the building. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. click Finish Sketch. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. for Bottom. click Edit. for Level. select Unlimited. for View Range. click Plan Region.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. 13 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). 11 On the Options Bar.

the fire rating of the walls. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. in this case. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click the Filters tab.rvt. After you apply the filter.17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. under Views (all).

click Add. enter Rated Walls. for Color. select Fire Rating. and apply a color. 16 Click OK. for Rated Walls. and click OK. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Walls. select Solid Fill. Enter Hr. under Categories. click (New). 14 In the Color dialog. click OK. 11 Select Rated Walls. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 12 On the Filter tab. for Pattern. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Select contains. 17 Using the same method. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. 10 On the Filter tab. click <No Override>. click Remove. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click Override under Patterns. 9 Click OK. click Edit/New. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. under Filters. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. and click OK. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. under Projection/Surface. 7 In the Filters dialog. and click OK. select the red color. under Basic colors. and click OK. 5 In the Filters dialog. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill.

you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. To accomplish this. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you obscure geometry in portions of a view.

3 In the Rename View dialog. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. and click OK. as shown. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 11 In the Type Selector. 9 On the View Control Bar. click Masking Region. select Invisible lines. 8 Select the crop region.rvt. right-click. 5 On the View menu. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. under Floor Plans. 4 On the View Control Bar. click Show Crop Region. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . 7 On the View menu.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.

12 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. click (Rectangle). 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 On the Design Bar.

click black. under Pattern Overrides. right-click. click in the Patterns field. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. select Walls.rvt. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. under Visibility. and click Override. 4 On the View Control Bar. right-click Unit 18 Plan . and click OK. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. click <No Override> to apply a color. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . select Solid fill. under Floor Plans. for Pattern. and click OK. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. 11 Click OK twice. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 3 In the Rename View dialog.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 7 Under Cut. for Color. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. right-click. 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and click 1: 50. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects.Level 1. click the current scale.

under Visibility. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. and click OK. clear Grids. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. clear Floors.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 16 Under Visibility.

18 Right-click. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 . and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.

and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. By using the previous method to make the selection. click a purple color. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. click Override. select Dash. under Lines. and click OK. select the sofa. 21 Under Projection/Surface. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. right-click. for Color.20 Right-click. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. for Pattern. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. click <No Override> to apply a color. 25 Click OK twice. click Projection Lines. 23 In the Color dialog.

29 In the Color dialog. and click OK twice. right-click. click Modify. 30 On the Design Bar. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. click . click By Category Override. select a bright green color. 32 Select one of the lamps.28 For Color. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color.

34 Click File menu ➤ Save. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. how to add views to the sheets. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. click .33 On the View Control Bar. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson.

2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 .Creating Sheets. right-click. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. click Sheet.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. and click OK. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. select A0 metric.rvt. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. and click View.

click Modify. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . click Modify. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). Click OK. For Sheet Name. expand Sheets (all). Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. enter Site Plan.Unnamed. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. 3 In the Project Browser. and select the title block. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. For Sheet Number. 7 On the Design Bar. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. 5 When the title block highlights. enter A101.

The new project information displays in the titleblock. enter 2009-1. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. MA 12345 12 Click OK.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter Freighthouse Flats. For Project Status. Smith. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. For Client Name. enter For Approval. enter 15 May. for Project Address. under Other. For Project Name. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . enter J. For Project Number. click Edit. 14 Click OK. 2009. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date.

16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Layout Plan A104 . create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 .Elevations A105 . for Name. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. and click Save. you add views to these sheets.rvt. and click OK. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. select A0 metric. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser.Elevations A106 . 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. and click Rename.Sections A108 . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter Floor Plan. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. select the new sheet name.Stairs In the following exercise.Elevations A107 . 17 In the Project Browser. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. and click OK.

and drag it to the sheet. double-click A104 . 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. double-click A102 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. under Sheets (all). Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. select Level 1. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Sheets (all).Floor Plan.Elevations. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . under Floor Plans. and click to place the view. click Modify.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 6 In the Project Browser.rvt. The red border around the view no longer displays.

drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 12 On the Design Bar. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. align it with the East elevation. under Sheets (all).7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. click Modify. and click to place it. click Modify. and click to place it. double-click A107 .Sections. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). 11 Under Detail Views (Detail).

. and click OK. zoom in to the grip. and press TAB until it highlights. for View Scale. 16 Select title bar. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . move the cursor over it. select 1:5. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. and on the Options Bar.

Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. under Floor Plans. under Sheets (all). View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 18 Under Floor Plans.Stairs. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Level 1. double-click A108 . and click to place it. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet.

2 Select the building section view. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. 5 On the Design Bar. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 .rvt. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. In order to do this. and press ENTER. double-click A107 . click Modify. under Sheets (all). Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser.Sections.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. enter 16700 mm. right-click. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you must first activate the view on the sheet. and then make changes and deactivate the view. and click Activate View.

under Elevations (Building Elevation). Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. 7 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . After you create the sheet. and click Deactivate View.rvt. double-click North. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet.6 Right-click. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. You modify the view to hide the view title. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. For Sheet Name. under Floor Plans. enter T. and click Properties. select the new sheet name. click Camera.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Project Browser. select A0 metric. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . The camera view displays. enter Title Sheet. double-click Level 1. right-click. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Click OK. 7 Place the camera as shown. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. and click OK. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

Title Sheet. 13 In the Project Browser. for Eye Elevation. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Target Elevation. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. select Far Clip Active. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. 12 On the View Control Bar. enter 18000 mm. under Sheets (all). For Far Clip Offset. enter 1500 mm. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Click OK. enter 100000 mm. Under Camera. 11 On the View Control Bar. Under Extents. 14 Under 3D Views. and click to place it in the center of the sheet.8 On the Options Bar. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. double-click T .

and then click OK. 24 Click OK twice. select Scale (locked proportions). click Edit/New. click Size. 19 Select the view on the sheet. enter Viewport/no title mark. on the Options Bar. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. 25 On the Design Bar.15 With the view selected. click Modify. under Graphics. enter 635 mm. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . and on the Options Bar. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 In the Name dialog. Under Model Crop Size. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. for Height. and click OK. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select No. Click Apply. for Show title. . 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. click Duplicate.

and close the exercise file.26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

You also learn to create different types of schedules. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Because of the open style floor plan. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. such as room and window schedules.Level 1. such as doors and windows. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects.rvt. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. Tagging Objects In this lesson. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. 207 .Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. expand Floor Plans. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture.

4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . move the cursor to the right. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click Room and Area. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. click Room Separation. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing).2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. as shown: 5 Using the same method.

6 Using the same method. 9 In the Tags dialog. click Modify. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 7 On the Design Bar. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . click Load.

210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .rfa. click it. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. 13 On the Options Bar. type U18-1. indicating that it can be edited. 14 For Offset. and the rectangle contains the room tag. click OK. and press ENTER. click Modify. The room tag number displays in blue. verify that Tag on placement is selected. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. click Training Files. and click to place the room and tag. and select the room tag. 11 In the Tags dialog. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. type 2400 mm. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Room. 16 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 .18 Click the room text label. click Room. click Modify. 22 Click the room text label. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. Click to place the new room and tag. Dining. type Entry. 23 Using the same method. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. type Kitchen. 19 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. place rooms and tags. Sequential letters are also supported.

click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar. double-click Unit 18 Plan . on the Model Categories tab. but they need to be tagged. and moving clockwise.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Room Separation. The rooms are already placed. 29 On the Design Bar. click Modify. expand Lines. click Room Tag. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser.Level 2. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). under Floor Plans. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. in the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. you learn how to place door and window tags. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise.rvt.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Level 1. clear Leader. click Tag ➤ By Category. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . expand Floor Plans.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

type Storage. next to Rows. select Corridor. 10 Edit the number to be 101. For 105. The room Number is U17-46. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . for Name. For 104. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. and press ENTER. for room 101. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. add 5 more rooms. and press ENTER. select Storage. and press ENTER. click New. 101-106. 11 Using the same method. For 102. For 103.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. type Building Entry. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. type Corridor.

click the bright green swatch. 4 Click OK twice. and modify room names. click the Color field. In the Lines field. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. under Projection/Surface. select 9. type Stair. Under Custom colors. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. For Room Separation. 13 Save the file. under Visibility. you add room separation lines. In the Line Graphics dialog. For Weight. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Level 1. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. place rooms from a program list. and press ENTER.rvt. expand Lines. under Floor Plans. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click the Lines field.■ For 106. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. click Override.

draw the horizontal line. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . click Modify. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Room. click Room Separation. First. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. 9 On the Design Bar. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar.

13 On the Options Bar. select 101 Building Entry. 14 For Offset. for Room.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 11 On the Options Bar. type 2400 mm. for Room. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). select 102 Storage.

as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . place the following rooms. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). 16 Using the same method. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. under Schedules/Quantities. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). 20 While pressing CTRL. double-click Level 1. 19 In the Project Browser. and zoom in to the Corridor. 17 On the Design Bar.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. double-click Room Schedule. click Modify. under Floor Plans. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser.

and click OK. select Rooms. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. and click Add. and for all 3 finishes. under Available fields. under Category. clear Room Bounding. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Modify. 31 For Key Name. (Element Properties). and click OK. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Floor Finish. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. while pressing CTRL. 24 Open the Room Schedule. select Base Finish. click 23 On the Design Bar. type As Selected. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. 30 On the Options Bar. type Units. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. click New. and Wall Finish. 27 Select Schedule keys.21 On the Options Bar. for Rows. click Schedule/Quantities. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls.

for Room Style. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. select Units. select Room Style. 42 On the Options Bar. 33 In the Project Browser. for Fields. under Schedules/Quantities. 43 In the Filter dialog. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . 36 Click OK twice. under Identity Data. right-click Room Schedule. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Other. under Floor Plans. 38 Under U17-8. and click Add. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. for Available fields. click (Filter Selection). select Rooms. select Units. click Check None. add 2 more key names: Service and Public.32 Using the same method. 37 Open the Room Schedule. double-click Level 1. click (Element Properties). and click Properties. for Room Style. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. and click OK. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. 44 On the Options Bar. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. and click OK.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click OK.rvt. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and double-click Level 1. and click OK. (Duplicate). m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 9 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 104. 103. under Graphics. and apply it to the Level 1 view. type Room Type. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. select Service. click 5 For Title. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). select Room Style. at the warning prompt. for Name. and 106. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. select Public. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. click the Color Scheme field. under Views (all). 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Floor Plans. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 48 Save the file.46 Open the Room Schedule. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. type Room Type. click OK. for Color. and click Properties. For rooms 102 and 105.

Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. and clear Room Separation. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click Color Scheme Legend. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). 19 On the Options Bar. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Room Type. select the color legend. 14 Click OK twice. expand Lines. clear Visible. click Edit Color Scheme. click Modify. click Edit. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. click the value in the Color column. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none).11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 17 On the Design Bar. under Visibility. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. under Schemes. 12 In the Element Properties dialog.

27 In the Type Properties dialog. select blue. for Size. for Swatch Width. respectively. and click OK. 23 Using the same method. 28 Under Title Text. click Edit/New. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. (Element Properties). click Modify. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. 29 Click OK twice. under Graphics. 30 On the Design Bar. type 25 mm. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 24 Click OK. on the Options Bar.22 In the Color dialog. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. type 5 mm. under Custom color.

and select Properties. and click OK. click Edit. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . click Color Scheme Legend. under Sections. select Rooms. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. under Graphics. 35 Click OK twice. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. under Visibility. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Sections. select Room Type.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Building Section. for Color Scheme. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. right-click Building Section. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section.

40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. 46 Click . 45 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. and click OK. (Filter Selection). select Units. for Room Style. click . click Check None. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). and click OK. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. select all the rooms in the stairwell. select Rooms. under Identity Data. under Identity Data. 42 In the Filter dialog. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. for Room Style. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 41 On the Options Bar. select Public.

under Identity Data. under Schedules/Quantities.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. select Service. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. for Room Style. excluding the stairwell spaces. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. for Rows. double-click Room Style Schedule. 51 On the Options Bar. under Key Name for the new row. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. 54 While pressing CTRL. type Suites. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click . Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . click New.

The color fill extends to the roof. select Areas and Volumes. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. 59 Under Room Area Computation. 56 In the Element Properties dialog.55 Click . 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Identity Data. select Suites. but not beyond it. and click OK. for Room Style. and click OK. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. under Volume Computations. select the room on the left side of the top floor. The color fill will extend to the roof. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. verify that At wall finish is selected.

69 In the Element Properties dialog. type 0. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . for Upper Limit. click Modify.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. and the living room. for Upper Limit. type -254 mm. 66 Click OK. select Loft. under Constraints. 70 For Limit Offset. 71 Click OK. 67 On the first level. select the stairwell room. 68 Click . . the dining room. under Constraints. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). 72 On the Design Bar.0. select Level 2. and click 65 For Limit Offset. 64 In the Element Properties dialog.

double-click {3D}. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. under 3D Views. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser.73 Save the file. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise.rvt. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

For Then by.EPDM. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . Clear Itemize every instance. 3 While pressing CTRL. and click Add. under Category. select Family and Type. click Modify. 9 Using the same method. Select Grand totals. and click OK. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. select Roofs.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by.Insulation on Plywood Deck . 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Material: Description. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. click Family and Type. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. under Available fields. 4 In the Type Selector. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. 5 On the Design Bar.

13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 For Type. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. under Other. select Material: Area. 21 Click OK. 12 Click OK. select Material: Cost. select Currency. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. Under Field formatting.40 50.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. click Edit. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. select Calculate totals. select Calculate totals. and click OK twice. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. for Material: Cost. 23 For Field formatting. under Available fields. and under Fields. and click Properties. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. for Name. and click Add. click Estimated Cost. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 17 Click Calculated Value. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). type Estimated Cost. click the Formatting tab. 20 For Formula. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Fields.

30 Click OK twice. select $. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. which inserts commas after every three digits. ensuring consistency across families and projects. click the Format value.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. Digit grouping. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. In this lesson. 26 In the Project Units dialog. 31 Save the file. These shared parameters can be added to any family. tag the line. regardless of category. you create a shared parameter file. The cost fields are formatted correctly. 29 Select Use digit grouping. and reporting the shared parameters. creating a generic tag to tag the family. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 .Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. for Currency. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. and schedule the total distance of each path. and are defined and stored in an external file. can be used for any number-based parameter. 27 In the Format dialog. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. for Rounding. You draw a travel path line. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. either within family components or within the project template. 28 For Unit symbol. you create an exiting plan for the building. adding the shared parameters to a family. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. not just for currency.

11 Click OK twice. 9 Under Parameters. under Floor Plans. for File name. click New. select Length. for Name. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog.rvt. and click Save. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. type Exiting. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.txt. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click New.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. for Type of Parameter. for Name. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. click Training Files. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. click Training Files. under Groups. type Path ID. click Create. and click OK. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. type Travel Distance. for Name. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. click New. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 7 Under Parameters. type OfficeStandardsParameters.

rvt. Click Training Files. 4 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. 11 Click OK. 3 On the Design Bar. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. 13 Click Apply. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameters. under Dimensions. click Add. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. 8 Select Instance. under Parameter Data. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. in the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK. 15 If necessary. for Group parameter under.rvt. click Family Types. following the equals symbol (=). for Travel Distance Formula. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Add. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category.rfa. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. 14 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Family Types dialog. select Constraints. If you have multiple projects open. select Shared parameter. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. under Parameters. and click OK. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and select Instance. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. and click OK. group it under Dimensions. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click Load into Projects. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. and click Select. 12 In the Family Types dialog. 10 Using the same method. under Parameter Type. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. otherwise the family loads into the current project. type Length.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 .

22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. click Label. select Travel Distance. click parameter(s) to label). click Select. click (Add Parameter). 19 On the Design Bar.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. select Travel Distance. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 21 In the Edit Label dialog. click Label. and click OK. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. click Training Files. 24 Click OK twice. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. under Parameters.rft. under Category Parameters.

32 In the Save As dialog. type M_Travel Distance Tag. and click OK.28 On the Design Bar. click Modify. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. and press DELETE. and click Save. 29 In the drawing window.rvt is selected. click Load into Projects. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. for File Name. 35 Save the file. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. 33 On the Design Bar. and move it down. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 .rfa. select Path ID. 31 Click File ➤ Save As.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Placing. click Component. After the lines are tagged. above the exterior door as shown. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Exiting Plan . 2 Zoom in to the corridor. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise.Tagging.Level 1. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Chain. under Floor Plans. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. and click in the center of the corridor. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor to the right.

16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. move the cursor near the right corner. 13 While pressing CTRL. double click Exiting Plan . click Modify. 17 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. 8 On the Design Bar. through the door. and click (Element Properties). Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. verify that Chain is selected. select the 2 dashed travel lines. and click outside of the building. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . under Constraints. 12 On the Design Bar. Placing.Tagging.Level 2. clear Leader. for Path ID. type 1-1. and click OK. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Component. under Floor Plans. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan.7 Move the cursor down. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar.

22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. and click above the door to the stair. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 20 On the Design Bar. click Component. and click in the stair. click Modify. 23 Move the cursor down. and click. move the cursor to the left.19 Move the cursor up through the door. 21 On the Design Bar.

Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 30 Using the same method. . click Modify. 28 While pressing CTRL. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. click Modify. and click OK. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . and click OK. type Level 1 Exit Distance. under Constraints. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2.Tagging. for Path ID. 27 On the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category.24 On the Design Bar. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. Placing. type 2-1. under Category. 33 For Name.

in the first field. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. 40 Click the Formatting tab. and click Add. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. select Path ID. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. under Schedules/Quantities. and click Rename. in the third field. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. click Training Files. 38 For Sort by. and click Properties. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. while pressing CTRL. 43 In the Project Browser. under Available fields.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. type 2-. 36 For Filter by. under Other. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Path ID and Travel Distance. 46 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 49 Click OK twice. for Filter. 44 In the Project Browser. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. select Calculate totals. and under Field formatting. type Level 2 Exit Distance. 42 Click OK. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 41 Under Fields. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 50 Save the file.rvt. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 Click the Filter tab. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. click Edit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Travel Distance. and in the third field. type 1-. select contains. for Filter by. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Path ID. in the second field.

and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. 9 Click OK twice. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. and click . and click View.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. under Categories. 10 In the schedule.Fixed Partitions. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Interiors ➤ C10 . and select C1010145 .Partitions . and click Properties. select the following fields. and click OK. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. click the Value field. expand C . expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . 4 Under Available fields. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . right-click the Design Bar.152 mm. right-click Generic . click the Fields tab.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . click Schedule/Quantities. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. select Walls.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Assembly Code. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. under Identity Data.

6 Click Finish. click the File Data Source tab.mdb. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 8 In the New Database dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Database. click Training Files. and click Next. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 11 Click OK 3 times. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. 9 Under Directories. for Database Name. 1 On the File menu. type Revit_Project.11 Close the exercise file.mdb). select a location for the database file. the database display may be different than that shown. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. click OK. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 3 Click New.rvt. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. click Create. and click Next. and click OK to create the database. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source.

instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. in addition to the Id column. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. For example. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . 13 Close the exercise file. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. Additionally. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project.

262 .

as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. 263 . You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. like a standard door header condition. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. plywood.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. In order to detail from the building model. 297 . you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. and metal studs. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. you trace over the building model geometry. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. These components display at the required scale. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. In the callout view. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. add detail components. using detail components to represent materials like lumber.

After you add components. You load detail components. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the alert dialog.Detailing the View In this exercise. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.rfa. Exact location is not important. click Detail Component. which means that all detail components. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. They are also view specific. you detail the view of the roof edge. 7 In the drawing area. The roof overhang detail displays. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. and click OK. double-click the detail callout head. click Training Files. select As underlay. and click Open. click Training Files. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. as well as detail lines. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. region objects.rvt. and insulation objects. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view.

16 Click OK twice. 17 In the drawing area. click Duplicate. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. enter 406.8 Delete the component. 15 For Spacing. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New.5mm. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. click Repeating Detail. 13 In the Name dialog. for Pattern ➤ Detail. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. click Modify. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. select Corrugated Metal. click (Element Properties). 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 19 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. Detailing the View | 299 .

Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. and click Open. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. click (Move). 24 In the Type Selector. ■ ■ Click Modify. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. click Detail Component. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point.rfa. 22 On the Options Bar. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and on the Edit toolbar. click Load. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. click Training Files.

29 On the Design Bar. press SPACEBAR 3 times. and place it in the detail view as shown. 31 To properly orient the component. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 30 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. Detailing the View | 301 . click Training Files. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. click Detail Component. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog.Because you still have several components to load.rvt. click OK. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector. you load them as a group from a single file.

36 Place the wallboard component as shown. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 35 On the Options Bar.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 38 Select the horizontal segment. click the Flip instance arrows. and click Modify. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. 37 Click Modify. select Chain.

42 Click Modify. ■ Click Modify. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. click Detail Component. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. and on the Edit toolbar. click Insulation. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. For Offset. Detailing the View | 303 . 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. as shown. click (Move). enter 140mm. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. select to near side.

Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. Like detail components. meaning they display only in this view. and lock the component. 51 Click Modify.45 In the Type Selector.rvt. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the Type Selector. as shown. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. 47 In the Type Selector. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. select Thin Lines. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. you add lines to your detail. click Detail Lines. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. they are view specific.

13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. 7 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. click Detail Lines. 11 In the Type Selector. For Offset.4 Click Modify. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). as shown. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 10mm. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. enter 10mm. select Thin Lines. 10 On the Design Bar. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. select Medium Lines. click Detail Lines. For Offset. as shown. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . and press ENTER.

as shown. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. and draw the detail lines as shown. select Chain. click (Draw). 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 16 On the Options Bar. and clear Chain.

24 On the View Control Bar. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. select the Penthouse level line. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. select Thin Lines. enter 10mm. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. click Detail Lines. and click Properties. select Vapor Barrier. 26 In the Type Selector.18 In the Type Selector. select Do not display. and press ENTER. right-click. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. For Offset. and click OK. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . draw the detail lines as shown. Click (Pick Lines). for Graphics ➤ Display Model. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. When you turn the display model off. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. 22 In the Project Browser. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut.

select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. 30 In the Type Selector.29 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. 32 Click Modify. select M_Break Line. Adding Text Notes on page 308. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. press SPACEBAR as necessary. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. click Detail Component. you add text notes to complete the detail. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail.

click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. 2 On the Options Bar. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Enter the text. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. Adding Text Notes | 309 .Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Dimension. 6 Click Modify. and click to place the dimension. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. click Text. Click again to specify the location of the text box. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component.

and click the dimension text. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. (Filter Selection). Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. enter Roof Overhang Detail . 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Rename View dialog. select a text note. for Suffix. right-click.. under Text Fields. and click Rename. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. Creating Detail Components on page 310. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. and click OK. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Select All Instances.rvt. enter Typ. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser.Keynotes. and press DELETE. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and save the exercise file. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click 6 In the Filter dialog. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. and click OK.7 Select the dimension line. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. click Roof Overhang Detail. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. right-click. and click OK. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. on the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. right-click.

pressing TAB. and click Open. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. click Training Files. 14 Click Modify. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.rft. in the Type Selector. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 15 Use a window to select all linework.7 Click Modify. while pressing CTRL. select all the coping linework. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. select Medium Lines. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. and selecting the chain. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. 16 Click Modify. Creating Detail Components | 311 . 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

27 On the Design Bar. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. click Detail Component. click Load.rfa. While pressing SHIFT. and click OK. 31 Using the same method used previously. The original linework remains selected. delete the underlying linework. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. click Load into Projects.18 In the Save As dialog. for File name. and click Open. click Detail Component. 21 To place the component. 23 Using a window. 28 On the Options Bar. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the coping. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. navigate to your preferred location. 24 On the Options Bar. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. double-click it in the Project Browser. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 30 In the drawing area. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. enter Roof Edge.Keynotes view is not the open view. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. 22 Click Modify. and click Save. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and the component can be placed in the detail. click . click Training Files. clear Detail Items. 26 Press DELETE. you place keynotes on objects. 25 In the Filter dialog. Adding Keynotes on page 312. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component.

navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. and click Open. click Keynote ➤ Element. Click to place the leader arm.rvt. use keynote 07645. select the metal fascia with drip edge. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.B5. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. In the Keynotes dialog. Roof Edge4. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area.rfa. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click OK. 63mm Rigid Insulation. For the metal coping. use keynote 06160. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. (Element Properties).Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the alert dialog.D11. 6 Click Modify. click Edit/New. Adding Keynotes | 313 . and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. 19mm Plywood. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag.C1.

A8. click Detail Component. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. FasciaProfile_1. You do this in order to keynote the component. For the 50 x 300. 11 Click OK 3 times. 17 Keynote the component. using keynote 07460. use keynote 06110. use keynote 06110. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge.F1. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag.G1. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. For the 50 x 200. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. select Corrugated Metal. 15 In the Type Selector. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. navigate to 07645. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 12 On the Design Bar.F1. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties.I1. 18 Save the file. 22mm Corrugated Steel . use keynote 09250. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. click in the Value column.9 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.D11. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . use keynote 06110.D1. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. and click . For the 50 x 150. click Keynote ➤ Element. use keynote 06160. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar.20 Ga.

9 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. and click Open. and click Modify. click Training Files. 8 In the Save As dialog. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and m_Light Line Detail Component. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 19 In the Name dialog. 20 Click OK 3 times. for File name. 15 Click Modify. 16 Select the component. 4 In the Type Selector. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component.rft. and click Open. click Detail Component. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. click Load. navigate to your preferred location. 6 Lock the line. select Medium Line Detail Component. and select the right end point. click Lines. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 11 Press DELETE. 5 In the drawing area.rvt. and click Save. click Edit/New. 13 In the Type Selector. 22 On the Options Bar. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 While pressing CTRL. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. select the left end point of the reference line. click Detail Component. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. and click (Element Properties). click Duplicate. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . m_Invisible Line Detail Component. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. click Load into Projects. click Training Files.

37 Click OK 3 times. 48 Using the same method used previously. 29 In the drawing area. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. and assign it keynote 07260. 42 Using the same method used previously. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 49 With the component selected. name the component Air Barrier. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 33 In the Type Properties dialog.25 Next. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. click Detail Component. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. and click the lower end at the break line. click (Move). you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. select m_Light Line Detail Component. 27 On the Design Bar. click in the Value column. 43 Zoom to the repeating component.G1. 44 On the Design Bar. and click . 47 Select the component. You add the components to the project and keynote them.A1. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. 38 On the Design Bar. and hidden) used in the view. 34 In the Name dialog. on the Edit toolbar. click Detail Component. 40 Click Modify. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing.A5. and assign it keynote 06110. 31 Select the component. click Duplicate. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 41 Select the component just added. click Edit/New. 46 Click Modify. 28 In the Type Selector. invisible. and click . against the 19mm plywood. and click . 30 Click Modify. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Component. enter EPDM Membrane. and click .

Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . click Detail Component.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. leaving the detail component lines. and click . 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 52 In the Type Selector. select Chain. 53 On the Options Bar. 55 Click Modify. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier.

rfa. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component. and assign it keynote 07260. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing .rfa.58 Using the method used previously. 60 On the Design Bar. and Vapor Barrier. 67 In the Type Selector. name the component Vapor Barrier. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 50 x 200 Framing. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. click Keynote ➤ Element. 63 In the drawing area. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Invisible Lines. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. in the Type Selector. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. click Load into Projects. Air Barrier.A4. 68 In the drawing area. 61 In the drawing area. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. select the component.

Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. under Keynote Table. 70 Using the method used previously.A1. add a keynote for the component. name the component Batt Insul. Enter 07460. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. and press ENTER. and close the text editor. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise.rvt. and press TAB. and click .69 Select the component. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460.txt.. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . 72 Save the file. The database file opens in a text editor. and assign it keynote 07210.A4. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. 71 In the drawing area. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. click Browse. and press TAB. Enter 07463.A9. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the text editor. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting.

A1. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. 14 Save the file. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. you learn how to create a drafted detail. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. In the Type Selector. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. select Absolute. 13 Click Modify. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. and click Open. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . After you create a drafting view. navigate to 07463. 11 Click Modify. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. These details do not update with changes to the building model. 9 In the drawing area. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. and click to place the note. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. select all the keynotes. and click OK. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). click Keynote ➤ Element. Each keynote displays as a simple number. click to place the leader. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. and click OK. under Path Type.txt. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components.

and click Rename. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. click Training Files.rvt.dwg. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. For Colors.Center to Center is selected. Click Open. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. for Scale. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. The detail is imported as an import symbol. select 1 : 5. verify that Auto . right-click Drafting 1. The detail that you import is in DWG format. select Black and White. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 6 In the Project Browser. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . enter EPDM Metal Coping.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. For Positioning. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK.

9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Properties. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail).Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. click Rename. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 6 Select the callout. delete the existing value. for New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. The callout head no longer displays a reference label.No Reference. select Reference other view. 12 Click OK twice. click Callout. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. 5 Click Modify. 10 In the Rename dialog. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. and click OK. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. enter Detail . 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 3 On the Options Bar.

you create a door head condition in the new drafting view.No Reference). 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view./Sect. click Modify. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. The callout is updated with the sheet information.Elev. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. 18 Save the file.Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 ./Det. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. and double-click the callout. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click A105 . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise.

and click OK. Board. enter Header @ Sliding Door. click Edit/New. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. click Duplicate. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. select Gypsum-Plaster. and click OK. 5 In the Type Selector. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. click Detail Component. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. click Filled Region. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing .rvt. 14 Click OK 3 times. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Gyp. . 12 In the Type Properties dialog. for Name. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. for Name. 3 On the View Control Bar.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 11 In the Name dialog. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Region Properties. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown.

click (Draw). select Wide Lines. click 22 On the Options Bar. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. select the left and bottom edges of the region. (Mirror). Draw a rectangle as shown. and on the Edit toolbar. 17 Click Modify. Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point.5mm. select the width dimension. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . and enter 20. click Finish Sketch. 18 While pressing CTRL.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 19 In the Type Selector. 16 Select the left edge of the region. 20 On the Design Bar. click .

for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. and click OK. 25 Click Modify. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. select Wood . 29 In the Type Properties dialog. Move the cursor up. and click above the top of the region as the end point. click Region Properties.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. enter Wood . Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. . 31 In the Type Properties dialog. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. click Duplicate. 33 Click OK 3 times. 30 In the Name dialog. click Filled Region.Finish. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing .Finish. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. for Name. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Edit/New. 24 Select the mirrored region.

click (Align). Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. click (Rectangle). Draw a rectangle as shown. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. verify that the thickness is 19mm. in the Type Selector. 37 On the Design Bar. sketch the new region as shown.5mm. click Filled Region. and select the right edge of the wood region. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. 40 On the Options Bar. select Medium Lines. select Medium Lines. click . 38 On the Design Bar. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. click Finish Sketch. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 .

46 On the Tools toolbar. and press ENTER. click Ref Plane. click Filled Region. enter 6mm. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. 47 Click the reference plane. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. For Offset. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. click Finish Sketch. (Align). click 48 Click Modify.42 On the Design Bar. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. For Offset. enter 10mm.

and click to select the point. and select the bottom horizontal line. 56 On the Design Bar. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. Move the cursor left 25mm. Move the cursor right 25mm. and click to select the point. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . enter 0.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). Move the cursor down 305mm. and click to select the point. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. click Finish Sketch. and press ENTER. 54 On the Tools toolbar. click (Trim/Extend). Select Chain. For Offset.

67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. and right edges of the door panel region. 68 Click Modify. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. and press ENTER. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter 76. 61 Click Modify. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. 60 Select the left. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. enter 3mm. 69 Select the bolt. click Detail Lines.2mm. click Load. 65 On the Options Bar. select Medium Lines. and click Open.rfa. 62 Select the left detail line. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). top. click Training Files. click Detail Component. select the height dimension. and press ENTER. For Offset. 58 In the Type Selector. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing .Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar.

click Load. click Detail Component. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side.rfa. use the images as a guide. 71 On the Options Bar. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. and click Open. 76 In the Type Selector. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. select Wide Lines. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Detail Lines. 74 Select the expansion bolt.70 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . click Training Files.

(Mirror). 84 On the Design Bar. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 79 In the Type Selector.78 On the Design Bar. 87 Click Modify. click Detail Lines. click . click Detail Lines. and on the Edit toolbar. 82 Select the rectangle. 80 On the Options Bar. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 85 On the Options Bar. select Thin Lines. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. click .

Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. and on the Edit toolbar. 89 On the Design Bar. 90 In the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. 92 Select the line. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. click (Mirror). click Detail Lines. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. as shown.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 .

334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 103 Add two break lines as shown. 95 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. click Detail Component. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. 97 On the Options Bar. 99 Click Modify. and click to place the arc as shown. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 101 On the Design Bar.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. click . select the length dimension. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. select M_Break Line. enter 3mm. 102 In the Type Selector.

5mm Arial.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. 106 Click to place the dimension. using the Drag Text grip. and click Modify. drag the text for the smaller dimension. click Dimension. and click Modify. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. 108 In the Type Selector. click Dimension. 105 In the drawing area. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 107 On the Design Bar. 110 Select the dimension line.

enter See Schedule. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog. click Dimension. under Dimension Value. select Replace With Text. for Below. 118 Select Modify to end the command. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. 114 Click OK. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. and click the dimension text.2. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 113 Under Text Fields.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. under Dimension Value.5mmArial. and then click the dimension text. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. select Replace With Text. and enter Varies. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions.

Enter 225 mm @ Type C. 125 In the Options Bar. 127 Enter Gyp. click Text. Board. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. 126 In the drawing area. 123 Click OK. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. and click to place the text. click (Add Right Arc Leader). click to create an arced leader. select the gypsum board region on the left. and on the Options Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. 128 Select the note. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar.121 Click OK. and click Modify.

131 On the Design Bar. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 132 Save the file. click Modify to end the command.

The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. and double-click East.rvt. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. 339 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text.

and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . 5 On the Options Bar. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Select the keynote. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 7 On the Design Bar. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Training Files. click Symbol. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. for Number of Leaders.rfa.Hexagon. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. type 1. click Modify.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

and click above the tag to place the copy. Creating a Note Block | 341 . 13 Select the tag. under Identity Data. on the Options Bar. for Text.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. click (Copy). 12 On the Edit toolbar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). and click OK. type Seal existing doors and insulate.

on the Edit toolbar. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. type B. type Repair existing door surround. (Mirror).14 With the copy selected. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. click (Element Properties). and click. 19 With the tag selected. click Copy. 16 For Tag. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 15 For Text. on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 17 Click OK. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 18 Using the same method.

Remove all existing windows. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. 22 Optionally. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. click Modify. using the table as a reference. Repair as required. and moving counter-clockwise. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . Clean exterior brick wall. Repair existing door surround. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Tuckpoint as required. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation.21 On the Design Bar.

29 In the Project Browser. select Tag.Elevations. for Heading. On the Formatting tab. Create. select Tag. 27 In the column header (text). Clean cut and repair wall as required. On the Appearance tab. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. select Center. under Available fields. select Exterior Construction Notes. type Exterior Construction Notes. for the value. 26 Click OK. expand Schedules/Quantities. verify that Arial is selected. and double-click A103 . and click Add. and click OK.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. type Mark. type Description. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. for Note block name. for Sort by. and drag it to the sheet. for Header text. and for Alignment. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Select Text. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. 28 In the Project Browser. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. type 6 mm. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and select Bold. and click Add. format. expand Sheets (all).

Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. under Sheets (all). double-click T . 32 Zoom in to see the note block. 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 1 In the Project Browser. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. Using Drawing Lists | 345 .Title Sheet.31 On the Design Bar.rvt. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. click Modify. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

5 In the list title field. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. and drag it to the sheet. expand Schedules/Quantities. and in the third field. in the first field. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select Sheet Index. and click Add. ■ 4 Click OK.Title Sheet. select Sheet Number. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. type T. for Filter by. 7 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. The drawing list displays. On the Filter tab. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. select Sheet Number.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. Select Sheet Name. and click Add. double-click T . select does not equal. select Sheet Number. under Sheets (all). for Sort by. under Available fields. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. in the second field. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab.

you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. For the text. doors. On construction documents. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. and so on). and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. Finally. Training File Using Legends | 347 . 11 Save the file. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them.9 On the Design Bar. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. and door frames. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. windows. On construction documents. click Modify. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. door frame schedule. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule.

348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . for Name. type Typical Symbol Legend. type 3mm. and click OK. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Symbol. click Duplicate. and click OK twice. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . select Arial. type Legend Text. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. 6 On the Options Bar. you create a text type with the necessary size. 9 For Text Font. click Edit/New. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . click .rvt. 10 For Text Size. for Name. click Text.Open Level Head . and click OK. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. 8 In the Type Properties dialog.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties.

13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. and click to place it. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. click Typical Symbol Legend. expand Sheets (all). 16 In the Project Browser. and double-click A101 . expand Legends. verify that is selected. and for Leader. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 14 Working from the top down.Site Plan/Floor Plan.

and click to place it. click Modify. 21 In the Type Selector. click Modify. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. select Viewport : No Titlemark.Unit 18. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 19 In the Project Browser. 23 Save the file. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 18 On the Design Bar.17 In the Type Selector. 22 On the Design Bar. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. under Sheets. double-click A102 .

select 1 : 50. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Section. click Legend Component. For View. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. 2 In the New Legend View dialog.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. 3 For Scale. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. select Medium for Detail Level. type 900 mm. for Name. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. 5 On the View Control Bar. type 4th Floor Wall Types. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. For Host length. and click OK. Creating a Component Legend | 351 .rvt. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. and press ENTER.

13 On the Options Bar. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. click Modify. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. click Text. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. for Leader. 10 Select the second wall. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. click to add text without a leader.9 On the Design Bar. for Family. and on the Options Bar. 12 In the Type Selector.

Creating a Component Legend | 353 . The text note with leader is added to the legend. click OK to accept the default titleblock. click to add text with a single-segment leader. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. and drag it to the new sheet. under Floor Plans. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 19 Type the following text. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Project Browser. pressing ENTER between component descriptions.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. right-click Sheets (all). and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. and click New Sheet. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. select Level 4.

26 On the Design Bar. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. under Floor Plans. select 4th Floor Wall Types. 29 In the Project Browser. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. click Modify to end the command. The open drawings are both visible. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. drag it onto the sheet. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. under Legends.25 In the Project Browser. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . double-click Level 4. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing.

select Detail Level: Medium. 33 In the floor plan view. select the Wall Type 2 component. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. 34 Select the patio divider wall. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. click (Match Type). The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. Creating a Component Legend | 355 . 35 On the View Control Bar.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. unanticipated changes in construction conditions.rvt. click 37 Save the file. In this exercise. Using the table. contractor inquiries. double-click Level 4. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. or changes in building material availability. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. These changes can be due to owner requests. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project.36 Optionally. You can create a sequence of revisions.

type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. If you select Per Sheet. When you use this option. type a date. for Numbering. If Visible is not selected. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 7 Under Show. In most instances. yet as concise as possible. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. When Issued is selected. if the active revision is number 1.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. For example. the revision is locked and issued to the field. In general. verify that Per Project is selected. 5 For Description. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . revision descriptions should be comprehensive.

358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .8 Click OK. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the divider. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. move the cursor up. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. 5 Select the divider. click (Move). You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. double-click Level 4. click Modify. under Floor Plans. you make changes to the project floor plan. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. 6 On the Design Bar. 9 Save the file. including revision number and revision date. 4 On the Edit toolbar. Revision clouds have read-only properties. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched.

and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. In the Snaps dialog. and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. select Snaps Off. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. click near the partition you moved.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 8 In the drawing area. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. click Revision Cloud.

select 6. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. for Line Weight. click the Annotation Objects tab. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 17 Save the file. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 16 Click OK. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. you load a revision tag into the project.

the cloud is tagged as number 1. Working with Revisions In this exercise. click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. scroll down to Revision Clouds. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . 4 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa. 12 Save the file. click Tag ➤ By Category. select Leader. 8 In the Tags dialog. 10 In the drawing area.rvt. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. 5 In the Tags dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. click Training Files. Because you chose to number by project. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. double-click Level 4. 11 Click to place the tag.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you create additional revisions in the revision table. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. You then issue a revision. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. 6 Click Load. under Floor Plans. and because the revision is the first in the project. you need to add one. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. click Tags. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and enter a date. with the description Relocate Door. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. and click OK. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. type Modify Paving Area. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 9 Click OK. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. NOTE After you issue a revision. you can no longer modify it. 7 For Description. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. double-click A107 . Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. under Sheets. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 Add another revision row. You can continue to add revisions. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. select Issued. you prevent further changes to the revision.Unnamed. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Add. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. You do this by issuing the revision.rvt. and enter a date for the revision.

Working with Revisions | 363 . 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. double-click A107 . select Tag ➤ By Category. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. select the revision cloud. click to add a revision clouds. 3 . under Floor Plans. 12 In the drawing area.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. for Revision. 19 To add tags. select Revision Cloud. 20 On the Project Browser. 17 Using the same method learned previously. 2 . double-click Level 4. under Sheets (all). 10 In the Project Browser.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. 13 Click Finish Sketch. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. in the drawing area.Unnamed. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. 15 On the Options Bar.Modify Paving Area. apply Seq. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. 11 On the Drafting tab. select Seq.

Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 26 In the drawing area. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. you edit the titleblock family. You do this so that the revision can be changed. beginning with "D". Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. for Sequence. height. Click Options. clear Issued. select Alphabetic. and rotation) to the revision schedule. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. For each revision. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. for Numbering. delete the first 3 characters. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. select the titleblock. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 25 Click OK twice.

and drag it above the schedule area. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. Working with Revisions | 365 . 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Yes. 28 In the alert dialog. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. click Edit Family. and click Properties. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. right-click Revision Schedule. 33 Select the schedule header. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected.27 On the Options Bar. click Edit. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. and press DELETE. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. for Appearance. click Load into Projects. under Other. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. click Modify. click Yes. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. for Build Schedule. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. 34 On the Design Bar. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. Select Grid lines. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. select Bottom-up. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. Select Outline. Clear Blank row before data.

46 Click OK twice. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. and click Properties. right-click Revision Schedule. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. for Rotation on Sheet.. select 90° Counterclockwise. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. 40 Select the revision schedule header. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select User defined. for Heading. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. select the revision schedule. the schedule is restricted to a specific size.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. enter Rev. open the titleblock family for editing. for Height. 45 On the Appearance tab. for Formatting. When the height property is variable. under Other. and on the Options Bar. click Edit. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. With a user-defined height.

Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. click Yes. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. click Load into Projects. 51 Save the file. you learn to import information (such as images. text. Importing from Other Applications | 367 .

Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. double-click T .JPG. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. under Sheets. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click T . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. and place it on a sheet.Title Sheet. 3 On the Options Bar. under Sheets.Importing Image Files In this exercise. click Text. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 On the Design Bar.Title Sheet. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. for Leader. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Training Files. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. click to add text without a leader. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo.

doc text file in another window. 9 On the Design Bar. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . with the new text box still selected. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 11 Save the file. click Modify. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. 6 Select the text. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise.

JPG. double-click A102 . 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. 1 In the Project Browser. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Training Files. and saved as Fixture Schedule. 5 Click OK. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. 4 Under Printer. This process may vary from system to system. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. and click Save. click Desktop. for Name.JPG. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.mdi. type Fixture Schedule. 3 In Microsoft Excel.rvt. 10 On the Design Bar. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. This step has been completed for you. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. 7 In the Revit Architecture window.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. click Modify. 12 Save the file. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet.xls. This exercise demonstrates a common method. under Sheets. click File menu ➤ Print. for File name. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select the document writer. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog.Unit 18.

The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. you break up the plan into sections. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. 371 . for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. or footprint.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. as well as a large lab building. called dependent views. To effectively document this project. The large floor plan.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . click Training Files.

right-click Dependent on Level 2. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . The dependent view opens. click Zoom To Fit. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. 5 Click in the drawing area. and the model crop is the interior crop region.Aviary. 2 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. enter Level 2 . select the crop region. and click OK. and click Rename. 6 In the drawing area. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. right-click Level 2. 3 In the Project Browser. for Name. under Level 2. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. double-click Level 2. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 .8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. 9 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

14 Click in the drawing area.Labs. 12 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. enter Level 2 . 15 Select the crop region.10 Click in the drawing area. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . right-click Level 2. and click OK. click Zoom To Fit. and on the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. and on the Zoom flyout. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 11 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Rename View dialog. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. for Name. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). right-click Dependent on Level 2.

click Zoom To Fit. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. click Matchline. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. 20 Click in the drawing area.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click (Hide Crop Region).The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. under Floor Plans. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. and on the Zoom flyout. 19 On the View Control Bar. double-click Level 2.

24 On the Design Bar.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and click. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. click Finish Sketch. Click above the left corner of the lab building.

click Level 2 . 26 In the Object Styles dialog. 27 Under Matchline. 33 In the Project Browser. select 9.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and drag it onto the sheet. for Line Weight. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click OK. select Double Dash. expand Sheets. for Name. 31 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . right-click A101 . under Floor Plans. enter Level 2 Aviary. and click Rename. click the Annotation Objects tab. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. 28 For Line Pattern. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. and click OK.Aviary.Unnamed.

You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.35 On the Design Bar. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . under Floor Plans. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. for Target view.Labs dependent view on the sheet. 39 On the Options Bar. and place the Level 2 . click View Reference.Aviary is selected. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . click Modify. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. double-click Level 2.

41 On the Options Bar. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. for Target view.Labs.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. click Zoom To Fit. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . click Modify. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . 44 On the Design Bar. 45 On the Zoom flyout.

46 In the Project Browser. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . after modifying the annotation crop region. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. 48 Select the crop region. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. 47 On the View Control Bar. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. under Floor Plans. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. double-click Level 2 . select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. 49 If. click the far right control. right-click.Aviary. click (Show Crop Region).

51 On the View Control Bar. expand Level 1. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. and click OK. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). 52 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 53 In the Select Views dialog. click Zoom To Fit. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. but are not placed on sheets. select all views in the list. right-click Level 2. 54 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Dependent Views. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). 55 On the Zoom flyout. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . leaving 4 rooms visible in the view.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise.57 On the Zoom flyout. The matchline is already placed in the view.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. right-click South Elevation. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Zoom To Fit. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and double-click South Elevation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 2 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. click Training Files.

cropping the view to the aviary.Left. 4 In the Rename View dialog. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . and drag it toward the center of the view. 5 In the drawing area. enter South Elevation . 7 On the View Control Bar. enter South Elevation . and click Rename. click (Hide Crop Region). and click OK. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. 3 In the Project Browser. right-click South Elevation. for Name. for Name.The dependent view opens. expand South Elevation. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. cropping the view to the lab building. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. and click Rename.Right. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. select the Crop Region. 8 In the Project Browser. 11 Select the crop region. 9 In the Project Browser.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating a Perspective View on page 403.15 On the Design Bar. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. Creating a Perspective View | 403 .

on the View tab of the Design Bar. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. click Camera. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The perspective view displays. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt.

and click Show Camera. under Floor Plans. and select the crop boundary. double-click Site. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. and adjust the field of vision. Depending on camera placement. Creating a Perspective View | 405 .3 Zoom out. in the Project Browser. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. With the camera shown. right-click 3D View 1. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. as shown. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. If the camera is not shown in the view. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. as necessary.

and click OK. 11 Proceed to the next exercise.Day. 8 In the Project Browser.Day to open the view. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .6 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Exterior . right-click 3D View 1. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. and click Rename. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. enter Exterior . under 3D Views. 10 Save the file.

Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . You then duplicate the view. under 3D Views. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Exterior .rvt.Day. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. modify render settings. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. and render a daytime view of the exterior. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise.

Santa Monica. 5 In the Rename dialog. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. select Medium. under Background. 3pm. NOTE If a background image is required. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter Spring Equinox . select Edit/New. and click Rename. select Spring Equinox. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 3 In the Rendering dialog. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. and click Render. click (Show Rendering Dialog). for Sun. You adjust cloud settings as required. 6 Click OK twice. You create a location and time for the rendering. for Setting. under Lighting. for New. 8 Under Quality.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. In this case. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. 7 In the Rendering dialog. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. select Sky: Cloudy.

Click Save. click Desktop. click Show the rendering. For Files of type. click Export.9 In the Rendering dialog. After the image is rendered. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . 10 In the Rendering dialog. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Show the model. select Portable Network Graphics (*.png). Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog.

under 3D Views. To select a sequential list.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . under Ungrouped Lights.Night. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . click Render.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. you duplicate the view and change the settings.Day view to Exterior . You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. click Dialog). 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. under Ungrouped Lights. for Name. click OK. under Group Options. under Lighting. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Exterior . Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. click New. under Group Options. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . 16 With the Exterior .Day. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Flat Round : 60W . 24 In the New Light Group dialog. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. press and hold SHIFT.Flat Round : 60W . and click OK. select the first light. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. 25 Using the same method. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Move to Group. for Scheme. and click OK. enter Pool Lights.Flat Round : 60W . and click OK. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . enter Pool House Lights.Night.Night view open. click New. dialog. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. add 30 :Sconce Light .120V through 35 :Sconce Light .120V to the Pool Lights group. verify that Pool Lights is selected.120V. and click Artificial Lights. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. right-click Exterior .Flat Round : 60W . 19 In the New Light Group dialog. on the View Control Bar. and select the last light. 22 Using the same method. for Name. 27 In the Rendering dialog. select Exterior: Artificial only.

you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. you change the brightness of the exposure.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. 32 Save the file. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. enter 4. 30 In the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . under Image. click Show the model. In this example. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. and click OK. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. After the image is rendered. click Adjust Exposure. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. for Exposure Value.

and finally.rvt. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. define the perspective view and rendering settings. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. render the views. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. Adding RPC People In this exercise.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view.

click Modify. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. and place the component inside the pool house. 4 In the Type Selector. the person’s line of sight. Exact placement is not important. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. click Component. select RPC Female : YinYin. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. Adding RPC People | 413 . but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. 6 Select the figure. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. 5 On the Design Bar.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. and on the Edit toolbar. ■ (Rotate). under Floor Plans.

12 Click OK 3 times. select Cast Reflections. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. In order to see the figure’s reflection. under Parameters. for Render Appearance Properties. 14 Save the file. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. 13 On the Design Bar. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . By default. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. click Modify. click Edit. you can enable this option. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties).■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. under Identity Data. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. click Edit/New. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. on the Options Bar.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. c_Pool_House_in_progress. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 .rvt. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.15 Proceed to the next exercise. click Camera.

Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. select Section Box.The perspective view displays. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click 3D View 1. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. under Extents. and click OK. and click Properties. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. under 3D Views. 4 In the Project Browser. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

under Elevations (Building Elevations). Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . In order to accurately adjust the section box. 11 In the 3D view. double-click South. double-click Level 1. select the section box. under Floor Plans. 9 In the Project Browser. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. in addition to the 3D view.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 8 In the Project Browser.

size the box as shown. size the box as shown. right-click. 13 In the South Elevation view. select the section box.12 In the floor plan view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 14 In the 3D view.

and curtain walls. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . To create a daytime view. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. 17 Save the file. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. 18 Proceed to the next exercise.15 Maximize the 3D view. doors that contain windows or glass. and render the interior view. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall.

3 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. and click OK.rvt. c_Pool_House_in_progress. for Scheme.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Draft. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. clear Pool Lights. 4 In the Rendering dialog. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. you turn them off for this scene. 5 Click Artificial Lights. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. click (Show Rendering Dialog). under Lighting.Night. 2 In the Rename View dialog. enter Interior . 8 In the Rendering dialog. right-click 3D View 1. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. select Interior: Artificial only. click Render. 7 Under Quality. and click OK. for Setting. After these settings are established. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . You can specify a lower quality. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. under 3D Views.

You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. select Edit. The preset schemes are read-only. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. for Daylight Portal Options.Night. (Show Rendering Dialog). 17 In the Rendering dialog. select Spring Equinox . for Sun.Day. the daylight portals can be turned on. you must create a custom setting. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 .9 Close the Rendering dialog. You create a view for the interior during the day. 13 In the Rendering dialog. click Copy To Custom. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior .Santa Monica. in order to turn on daylight portals. click 14 For Setting. right-click Interior . The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. 3pm. select Curtain Walls. for Scheme. For more information on daylight portals. select Interior: Sun only. For sunlit interiors. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. and click Render. In this case. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. and click OK. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. By default they are turned off. select Region. but the space will receive standard daylighting.

Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. click Adjust Exposure. select the column on the right.18 In the Rendering dialog. enter 1. and on the Options Bar. click Properties). (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter 10. and close the Rendering dialog. Click OK. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. click Show the model. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. 20 In the Rendering dialog. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. For Saturation. In the next steps. under Image. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light.

click OK. select Printer. for Resolution. 24 In the Materials dialog. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . For Width. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection.22 In the Element Properties dialog. For Rotate. and click OK. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. You change the varnish setting. the render time increases significantly. 26 Click Update Preview.6. add a bump map to create texture. 30 In the drawing area. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. 29 In the Rendering dialog. select the crop boundary. click (Show Rendering Dialog). Click OK. select Scale (locked proportions). For Bump. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. select High. select Based on wood grain. and click Render. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. select Unfinished. for Setting. 28 In the Rendering dialog. As size and DPI are increased. For Amount. clear Region. click the dimensions for Size. 32 In the Rendering dialog. under Output Settings. 23 With the column still selected. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. enter 90. select Wood. and on the Options Bar. enter 5''.

Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. In a plan view. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. elevation. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. but you can also define it in a 3D. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. The walkthrough path is a spline. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. or section view. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames.The rendered image displays. Usually. independent of the Revit Architecture software. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough.

and change unit formats as desired. click Settings ➤ Project Units. and open Common\c_Townhouse. and click the tab in the context menu. If you prefer to use metric values. expand Views (all). verify that Perspective is selected. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. proceeds through the dining room. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . and ends in the far corner of the living room.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise.rvt. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. and double-click 1st Floor. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. on the Options Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. expand Floor Plans. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. click Walkthrough. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown.

click Finish. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. and double-click Walkthrough 1.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. on the Options Bar. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). 11 Under Change. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. 16 On the Options Bar. enter 9''. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. 17 Click . 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. 14 Click . The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. for Width. select the crop boundary. 13 On the Options Bar. for Frame. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . and click OK. 12 On the View menu. verify that Field of view is selected. enter 1. and click OK. enter 16''. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. and for Height. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. click the dimensions for Size. If it is not. click Edit Walkthrough. on the Options Bar. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. and select the crop boundary.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips.

Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera.The walkthrough plays.rvt. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Edit Walkthrough. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. press ESC. c_Townhouse. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. double-click 1st Floor. click (Element Properties). The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. clear Far Clip Active. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. under Extents. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.

Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . 6 On the Options Bar. for Controls. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. select Path. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. 7 Click the third key frame position. You can move any camera target or key frame position. and drag it to the location shown.

8 If you want to save this exercise. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. under Output Length. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. under Walkthroughs. The walkthrough is recorded. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. for Model Graphics Style.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. and click OK. hidden line. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. If you are unsure of what option to use. shading with edges.rvt. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click File menu ➤ Save As. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. 3 Under Format. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. for Frames/sec. shading. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. click Edit Walkthrough. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. double-click Walkthrough 1. and click OK. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. reducing the size of the image. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. for Compressor. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. select <Shading>. specifying the number of frames. and click Save. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. enter 15. c_Townhouse. . you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. When you export the walkthrough. or rendering. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 To play the walkthrough. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. on the Options Bar. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system.

■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. In this tutorial. More specifically. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. 431 . Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year.

as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .rvt. click Training Files.Creating a Solar Study . you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. A 3D view is created. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. 4 On the View toolbar. and double-click 01 Entry.Courtyard View In this exercise. click shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. (SteeringWheels). as shown. expand Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. click Camera.

Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click Modify. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433.Courtyard View. expand 3D Views. if necessary. click Section. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. as shown. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you create a section cutaway view. 3 On the Design Bar. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. 7 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view.5 On the Design Bar. 9 On the File menu. click Save As. and click Rename. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 .rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. enter Solar Study . under Floor Plans. right-click 3D View 1.

5 On the Design Bar. as shown. 11 On the SteeringWheel. click 10 On the View toolbar. double-click the section head. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. (SteeringWheels). 8 In the Rename View dialog. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. click Modify. click . 7 In the Project Browser. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . right-click Section 1. expand Sections. 6 To view the section. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click Rename. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu.

6 In the Rename View dialog. double-click 01 Entry. you create a plan cutaway view. do not display many elements in 3D. click Callout. In some cases.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 16 On the View Control Bar. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. and click Rename. including the house. and click OK. 18 On the File menu. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 17 To hide the section box. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. then Fine. then select Medium. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. 5 In the Project Browser. Typical plan views. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. clear Section Boxes. click Save. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. as shown. click . under 3D Views. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. On the Annotation Categories tab. right-click {3D}. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. under Floor Plans. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 15 In the Rename View dialog.14 In the Project Browser. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. and click OK. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . 4 In the Project Browser. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435.

as shown. 16 On the View Control Bar. 9 On the SteeringWheel. so you can see into the building from the top. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .8 On the View toolbar. 11 On the Design Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. as shown. click (SteeringWheels). click Modify. 15 Select the Roof. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu.

Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. click Save. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. under 3D Views. right-click {3D}. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and click Rename. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study .17 On the View Control Bar. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . under 3D Views. 21 On the File menu. 18 In the Project Browser. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. 19 In the Rename View dialog. 20 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. and preview the effects of each study as an animation.

438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click click OK. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. Los Angeles.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. you specify the location. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 10 Under Place. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. and time. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. or multi-day solar study. MA. USA is selected. Click the Single-Day tab. For this study.Boston. For the Single-Day solar study. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. select Los Angeles. For the Multi-Day solar study. for City. click . expand 3D Views. 4 For Sun Position. you specify the location. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. USA. 2 On the View Control Bar. date. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. and click Duplicate. CA. expand Views (all). 3 Select Cast Shadows. enter Summer Solstice. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.Creating Solar Studies . and time range. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. date range. click . and click OK. 9 In the Name dialog. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. . You can create a still. single-day. leave the slider at 50.

Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . You can select the level to be used for shadow display. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 16 In the Name dialog.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 6 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. enter Winter Solstice. click . 7 On the Options Bar. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. select December 22. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. and click OK. confirm that Summer Solstice. click OK. Los Angeles. click . Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Los Angeles. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. 14 In this case. and click OK. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. 8 On the Options Bar. Los Angeles is selected. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset.Courtyard View is currently displayed. select June 22. under Frame. enter 10 and press ENTER. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. ■ For Time Interval. on the Single-Day tab. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. for Sun Position.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. Clear Ground Plane at Level. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Save. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. For Time Range. select Winter Solstice. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. click OK. and click Duplicate. 19 On the File menu. for Date. enter 20 and press ENTER. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. 2008. 2008. Under Frame. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame.

■ To display the next key frame. select Summer Solstice. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. click . Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. click OK.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. . 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. . You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. 13 On the View Control Bar. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. for Sun Position. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . . Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. under Floor Plans. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The solar study animation plays. approximately as shown. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. and click OK. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Text. click . PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. on the Single-Day tab. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. Los Angeles. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. double-click 01 Entry. click To play the animation from start to finish. click To display the next sequential frame.

7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. as shown. 5 In the Project Browser. click . click Lines. On the Options Bar. 8 For Sun Position. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. as shown. click . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. approximately as shown. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . 6 On the View Control Bar. expand 3D Views. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. Click and enter Dining.

On the Annotation Categories tab.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select the section box. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Los Angeles. click OK. select Frame Range. and enter 5 to 50. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. 12 In the drawing area. 14 Click outside of the section box. and click OK. as shown. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. and click OK. 15 To hide the section box. ■ For Frames per second. on the Single-Day tab. verify that the value is set to 15. select Section Boxes. On the Annotation Categories tab. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 11 To display the section box. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. clear Section Boxes. select Summer Solstice. and click OK. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. under Output Length. if necessary.

For Files of Type. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. click OK. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. For Frames per second. for Compressor. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. 2 On the View Control Bar. For File Name. and click OK. Under Format. or frame. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. click . click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. on the Single-Day tab. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. verify that Hidden Line is selected. select Winter Solstice. select AVI Files. Click OK.■ ■ Under Format. 19 In the Video Compression dialog.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. for Model Graphics Style. for Model Graphics Style. under Output Length. you open each image. and click OK. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . verify that Hidden Line is selected. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. 3 For Sun Position. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. verify that the value is set to 15. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. For Dimensions. To maintain the proportions of the frame. select Frame Range. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . of the animation separately. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. To view the animation.Los Angeles. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. Los Angeles. enter 450 in the first field (width). click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. and enter 5 to 10. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog.

you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. TIFF. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. or any single-frame format.■ For Dimensions. For Files of Type. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. For File name. depending on the Frame Range. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. select PNG. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. or GIF. enter 450 in the first field (width). 8 Click Save. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. In this example. click the Desktop icon. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. BMP. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. under 3D Views.Los Angeles. such as JPEG. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. click Save. as shown: 9 On the File menu. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . Click OK.

2 Select the section box in the drawing area. as shown. NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 .

14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. and click OK. select One week. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. 5 Select the roof. MA. 12 In the Name dialog. for Sun Position. and click Duplicate. and on the View Control Bar. 8 On the View Control Bar. clear Section Boxes. and click OK. click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . On the Annotation Categories tab. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. For Time. specify 2:00 pm.Los Angeles . click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . for File name enter 2pm . 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . USA. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain.Boston.Week Interval. and click OK. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. For Time Interval. click the Multi-Day tab. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine.

model views. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. and annotations in non-drafting views. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. 17 On the View Control Bar.South. and click Save.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. Re-orienting the Project | 447 . under Floor Plans. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. click OK. Click the Desktop icon. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. and click OK. you mirror all model elements. select Full Frames (Uncompressed).West or North . for File Name. such as East . double-click 01 Entry. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. When you mirror a project. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. for Compressor. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. In the Length/Format dialog.

and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. In this exercise. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 6 On the Standard toolbar. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view.West axis. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. right-click. and click OK. select East . you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. The project is mirrored along the East . you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . select the roof. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 In the drawing area. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. 5 In the warning dialog. Then. For additional information.West. under 3D Views. click OK.

9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . click . select Cast Shadows. and select Winter Solstice. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. change the time back to 12:00 PM.3 On the View Control Bar. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. and click OK. click Apply. 12 Under Date and Time. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify 11:00 AM for time. 11 For Sun Position. click the Still tab. click . Orienting to True North | 449 . For example. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. 8 For Sun Position. on the Still tab. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 10 Under Date and Time. and click OK. and click OK. 5 For Sun Position. select Summer Solstice. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.

click . This process establishes the view setting to True North. 18 In the Project Browser. When a project is started. select True North. click OK. under Floor Plans. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. double-click 01 Entry. for Orientation. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. click the Still tab. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Properties. the view settings must be set for True North. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. right click 01 Entry. and select Winter Solstice. 19 In the Project Browser. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. click OK. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. 14 On the View Control Bar. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. 15 For Sun Position. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK.

as shown. Orienting to True North | 451 . ■ To establish the new direction of True North. click above the end of the magenta line representing True North. click toward the top of the screen. The floor plan rotates in the view.■ To establish the True North direction.

select Summer Solstice. and click OK. right-click 01 Entry. under 3D Views. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 For Sun Position. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.23 In the Project Browser. select True North Orientation. for Orientation. and click OK. 28 In the Project Browser. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . right-click 01 Entry. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 32 On the View Control Bar. for Orientation. right-click. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. enter True North Orientation. select True North. right-click. and click OK. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and click Properties. and click Rename. click the Still tab. select Project North. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. and click Apply. click . Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. 25 In the Project Browser. 27 In the Rename View dialog. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. and click Element Properties.

The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. Click OK. click the Single-Day tab. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. Click Save. enter 600 in the first field. and click OK. for Compressor. click OK. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. Orienting to True North | 453 . enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. In the Length/Format dialog. under Format. For File Name. For Files of Type. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. Los Angeles.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click the Desktop icon. for Dimensions. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. and click OK. verify that AVI Files is selected. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. click Summer Solstice.

for Setting. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar. 2 In the Project Browser. 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. under Settings. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. capturing it. select Medium. for Date and Time. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. In this exercise. under Quality. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. For Sun. and click Duplicate. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. and click OK. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. select Interior: Sun only. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. Rendered views do not have this limitation. select 12/22.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. Under Lighting. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. for Scheme. Since a rendered image is temporary.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. click Render. select Edit/New. In the Name dialog. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and exporting it as a JPEG image. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. select Winter Solstice. (Show Rendering Dialog). and 2:00 PM. under 3D Views. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog.

The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. click Desktop. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . and click OK. enter living area_winter solstice. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Save to Project. click Export. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog.6 In the Rendering dialog. and click Save. For Files of type. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. verify that JPEG Files is selected. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project.

456 .

use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. linework. sections.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. advanced model graphics. length. Using the pre-built building model. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. elevations. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. you can choose between realism and stylistics. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. type. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. They include rendering. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. In this tutorial. you explore the stylistic approach. a consultant. Whether the audience is the general contractor. 457 . For the realistic approach. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. In this series of exercises. and details. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. and section boxes. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. Other tools in the software. an outside reviewer. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. Co-house. however. or the client. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. When organizing presentation graphics. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views.

Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. To fit the floor plan into the analytique. you create a copy of the plan. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. you create a presentation floor plan.

Cnst. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. click in the drawing area. under Floor Plans. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. Cnst. and click OK. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. and click Rename. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. exit the menu. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 3 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. right-click 2nd Flr. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . 2 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . dimensions. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. this represents the view getting smaller. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. Down Arrow. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. This turns off the visibility of all tags. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. 7 Under Visibility. and clear DOWN Text. and other annotations in this view. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. 8 Click OK. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. elevations. click the Scale control and select 1:100. navigate to the folder of your choice. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. UP Text. and Up Arrow. expand the Stairs category. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. and click Save. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. No annotations display in the view. sections.rvt. 11 In the Save As directory. click the Annotation Categories tab.

8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. on the Still tab. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. however. For Sun Position. select Sun and Shadow Settings. click (Shadows Off). At that place. select By Date. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. 6 Under Settings. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. select Cast Shadows. double-click it in the Project Browser. click OK. NOTE For this step. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Boston. click . click . 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. The higher the number. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. specify 10/27. Cnst. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. ■ For Contrast. 7 For Place. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. for Date and Time.rvt. 3 On the View Control Bar. the darker the shadows. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . 1:00 PM. you can create. 12 Click OK. MA. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. specify 35. 2 On the View Control Bar. If you select a different city. modify. and select 1st Flr. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. Time and Place. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. 9 For City. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. and click OK. Within a project. click the Place tab. and click Advanced Model Graphics. you can select any city.

and click OK. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. for Sun Position. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . . This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. and click Advanced Model Graphics. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. under Settings. click OK. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. clear Ground Plane at Level. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click (Shadows On).

6 On the Design Bar. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. click Add View. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. select Arch Portrait. right-click the Design Bar. click Modify. The viewport displays at the cursor. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. and click OK. and click to place it. and click View. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 .Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab is not available. and click Add View to Sheet. click Sheet. 4 In the Views dialog. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. and notice the view title.

and click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Name dialog. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. under Graphics. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Presentation. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. click OK. for Show Title. The viewport no longer displays a view title. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . To accomplish this. and click Activate View. click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. select No. For this analytique. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. click .Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. click Duplicate.

You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. When you finish drawing the chain. and select Chain. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. select Invisible lines. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. click . If necessary. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . click Edit/New. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. 20 On the Options Bar. and the boundary of the region. click Region Properties. click Filled Region. fill properties. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. 22 On the Design Bar.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. click . 17 In the Type Selector. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. 18 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

30 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click OK. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog.24 In the Type Properties dialog. under Name. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Finish Sketch. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. under Identity Data. and click Deactivate View. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. scroll down. for Fill Pattern. for Sheet Name. click OK. and click OK. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. enter Presentation. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. under Graphics. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Duplicate. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Solid Black. select Solid fill. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. 25 In the Name dialog. and click View Properties. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. click .

Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise.rvt. right-click South. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 . you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view.

15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Rename. specify 2:30 PM. under Elevations. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. 18 For Time. under Visibility. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. expand the Doors category. 14 For Sun Position. and clear Elevation Swing. 9 Click OK. click in the drawing area. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. exit the menu. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. enter Presentation South Elevation. specify 35. click Override.2 In the Project Browser. on the Model Categories tab. under Visibility. scroll up. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click in the Walls row. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. clear Visible. and click OK. 13 For Contrast. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Time and Place. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 11 On the View Control Bar. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. click Duplicate. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. under Settings. click OK. 12 Under Shadow. By changing the angle of the sun. and click OK. click . click (Shadows Off). and click OK. and click OK. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. select By Date. under Pattern Overrides. select Cast Shadows. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. and click Advanced Model Graphics. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . right-click Copy of South. 16 In the Name dialog.

21 Proceed with the next exercise. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet.rvt. click Add View. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). and click Add View to Sheet. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise.Presentation. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click A105 . 3 In the Views dialog.

470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 5 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation. The view title no longer displays.The viewport displays a view title.

Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. 7 On the Design Bar. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. click Modify.

The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. and use the flip arrows if necessary. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. Cnst. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 3 On the Options Bar. double-click 1st Flr. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. 4 Add the section shown below.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. select 1: 100. click Section. for Scale. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.

as shown. click Callout. To accomplish this. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view.Section 2 is added to the building model. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. To fit correctly in the analytique. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. and double-click Section 2. for Scale. this view needs to be rotated 180°. expand Sections (Callout 1). select 1 : 100. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Options Bar. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 .

18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. click Override. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Pattern Overrides. click Modify. click in the Walls row. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. double-click Presentation Section 2. under Sections (Callout 1). and click Rename. 15 Under Visibility. enter Presentation Section 2. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. and clear Elevation Swing. under Sections (Callout 1). 17 Under Visibility. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. right-click Callout of Section 2. clear Visible. click the Model Categories tab. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 11 In the Rename View dialog. scroll up. and click OK. 12 In the Project Browser. expand the Doors category.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Project Browser.

The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. When you select the crop region. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . 24 Proceed with the next exercise. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. 22 On the View Control Bar. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. click The crop regions no longer display. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. 20 Click OK. (Hide Crop Region). Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries.

you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. in the Project Browser. and click OK. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click . 2 On the View Control Bar. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. specify 35. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Cast Shadows. ■ For Sun Position. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . For Contrast. double-click Presentation Section 2.rvt. 6 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. Click Apply. The shadows do not offer much contrast. specify the following: Under Shadow. under Sections (Callout 1). click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). In addition. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 3 On the View Control Bar. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. In the steps that follow.

For Azimuth. Click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. for Silhouette style. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Altitude. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. Select Relative to View. click (Shadows On). You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. specify 135°. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . select Directly. was added to this training file for training purposes. and click OK. NOTE The line style. Silhouette Edges. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. specify 70°. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. select Silhouette Edges.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click OK.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. select Section: Presentation Section 2.Presentation.rvt. and click Add View to Sheet. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the selected view. 3 In the Views dialog. click Add View. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all).Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°.

Using a clock as a reference. under Sections (Callout 1). 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. 6 On the Design Bar. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. The section needs to be rotated 180°.5 In the Type Selector. In the steps that follow. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . double-click Section 2. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. you click to specify the start radius. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. select Viewport : Presentation. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. 9 On the Edit toolbar. click Modify. To rotate an object. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. click (Rotate). specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. The view title no longer displays. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. and press Enter. 8 Select the callout that you added previously.

The callout rotates 180°. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. double-click A105 .Presentation. 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Sheets (all). 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser.

Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. 17 Proceed with the next exercise.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. and drag it up and to the left as shown. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 15 On the Design Bar. After applying the view template to a new section view. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. click Modify. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 .

right-click Section 1. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . enter Presentation Section 1. 3 In the New View Template dialog. and click Rename.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. 4 In the View Templates dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. right-click Copy of Section 1. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Type 1). you can simply apply the presentation view template. double-click Presentation Section 2. 7 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. and click OK. under Sections (Callout 1). Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation. under Sections (Type 1).rvt. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. and click Deactivate View. The furniture. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . double-click A105 . select 90° Counterclockwise. select Presentation. under Sheets (all). for Rotation on Sheet. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. 12 In the Views dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Activate View. 15 Right-click the viewport. and elevation swings no longer display. under Graphics. 18 Right-click the viewport. click Add View. 17 In the Element Properties dialog.Presentation. select Section: Presentation Section 1. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click OK. under Names. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. and click OK. select Viewport : Presentation. annotations. 14 In the Type Selector. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. lighting fixtures.

20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. such as a tracery window or a column capital. In this exercise. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. traditional analytiques contain a detail. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

under Sections (Callout 1). and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . click Modify. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. double-click Section 1. click Callout. and click Rename. 4 In the Project Browser. After you add the callout. select the callout.rvt. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click Callout of Section 1. as shown. under Sections (Type 1).

clear Annotation Crop. double-click Presentation Callout. and click OK. 8 Right-click. as shown. under Extents.5 In the Rename View dialog. and click View Properties. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. 7 Select the crop region. and click OK. clear Crop Region Visible. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 6 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). enter Presentation Callout. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.

select Viewport : Presentation. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. specify 22. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. under Sheets (all). select Custom.Presentation. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. For Scale Value 1. and click Activate View. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 12 In the Views dialog.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar. click Add View. 14 In the Type Selector. select Section: Presentation Callout. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 . and click Add View to Sheet. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet.

Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. and make adjustments as necessary. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. 23 On the Design Bar. double-click Presentation Callout. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. and move it to the position shown below. click Region Properties. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click Filled Region. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . The composition set for the analytique is now complete. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. under Sections (Callout 1). activate the viewport. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. and click Deactivate View. click Edit/New. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. In the steps that follow. When finished. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet.

click . You do not have to replicate the image exactly. click Filled Region. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog.Presentation. click Finish Sketch. on the Design Bar. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. and click Activate View. for Fill Pattern. select Solid fill. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . and click OK 3 times. When you are finished. double-click A105 . 28 In the Project Browser. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms.25 In the Type Properties dialog. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below.

click . 34 Select the crop region. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .31 On the Options Bar. and sketch the rectangle shown below. The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. click (Show Crop Region). and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. click Finish Sketch. 33 On the View Control Bar. 32 On the Design Bar.

Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. and click Deactivate View. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. click (Hide Crop Region). 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport.35 On the View Control Bar. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows.

rvt. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click Advanced Model Graphics.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. double-click Isometric. under 3D Views. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. and apply shadows to the views. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. 3 On the View Control Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click the Scale control. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click (Shadows Off). and click 1 : 200. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 5 On the View Control Bar. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways.

and click OK. For Altitude. For Azimuth. select Cast Shadows. Select Ground Plane at Level. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. and click OK. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. enter Isometric 2. specify 45°. under Extents. 14 In the Project Browser.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. click . for Silhouette style. specify 135°. For Sun Position. enter Isometric 1. 15 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Select Relative to View. A section box displays around the building model. select Silhouette Edges. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under 3D Views. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. Click OK. 13 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. select Section Box. Select 1st Flr. under 3D Views. specify 35. and click Rename. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Rename View dialog. For Contrast. 8 In the Name dialog. double-click Isometric 2. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Isometric. in the list. and click Rename. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Duplicate. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. right-click Isometric 1. under 3D Views. select Directly. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . Cnst.

When you are finished. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. as shown. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box.19 Select the section box. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Grips display on each face of the section box. You can use this to rotate the section box.

select Viewport : Presentation. 27 Select the section box. When you are finished. and click OK. 22 In the Project Browser. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify on the Design Bar. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. under 3D Views. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . 31 In the Project Browser. 25 To hide the section box. double-click Isometric 3. under 3D Views. and click OK. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. and click OK. and click Rename. enter Isometric 3.Presentation. On the Annotation Categories tab. right-click Isometric 2. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. the stairs and railings may display. Next.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. 29 To hide the section box. 21 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. clear Section Boxes. under 3D Views. you can adjust the plane location. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. clear Section Boxes. 23 In the Rename View dialog. If desired. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. The section box no longer displays. under 3D Views. under Sheets (all). make a copy of the view. On the Annotation Categories tab. double-click A105 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. double-click Isometric 2.

In the Type Selector. under 3D Views. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. The filled region partially covers the view. In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation. 33 In the Project Browser.32 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. under 3D Views. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. select Viewport : Presentation. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

and click Activate View. click Edit. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 39 For Background. 40 Click OK twice. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . click Lines.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. The image below shows the redrawn lines. 36 On the Design Bar. This will make it easier to draw lines. select Transparent. select Concrete. click Region Properties. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. 35 Select the poche filled region. for Fill Patterns. On the Options Bar. 42 Using the drawing tools. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 On the Design Bar.

47 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. click Edit/New. 46 Click OK twice. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499.43 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. select Solid fill. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click Deactivate View. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Fill Pattern.

rvt. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Camera. a cutaway perspective view. under Floor Plans. then you specify the eye direction and range. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Cnst. you create the final view for the analytique. you add it to the presentation sheet. double-click 1st Flr. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. The view opens immediately. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location.

6 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. select Silhouette Edges. For Sun Position. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. for Name. and click Advanced Model Graphics. for Silhouette style. For Contrast. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). click . specify the following: Under Shadow. specify 35.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK.

under Extents.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Grips display on each plane of the section box. 12 Select the section box. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . select Section Box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. A section box now cuts through the building model.

double-click A105 .14 Select the crop region. enter 165 mm.Presentation. On the Annotation Categories tab. In the Type Selector. and click OK. click (Hide Crop Region). and click OK. click Size. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you must specify the actual size of the image. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. under Change. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. for Width. select Scale (locked proportions). 18 On the View Control Bar. select Viewport : Presentation. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. 19 To hide the section box. 15 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Project Browser. 17 Under Model Crop Size. under 3D Views. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. under Sheets (all). clear Section Boxes. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser.

under Text. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. select Text : Title. enter Title. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . 11 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. select the same font as the title.rvt. 6 In the Name dialog. and click OK. specify a text size of 40 mm. click Edit/New. 10 In the Name dialog. click OK. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Edit/New. enter Description. click Duplicate. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. click Text. 3 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click . 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select a font. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. specify a text size of 6 mm. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . under Text. and click OK.Presentation sheet is not the active view. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click it in the Project Browser.

15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 16 In the Type Selector. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. select Text : Description.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

and roofs. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. you create a small building from the front mass form. such as walls. After you import the SketchUp model. curtain walls. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. you can easily add detail with Revit components. that compose the building.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. Once the model has been imported. 507 . In this tutorial.

click Browse. select All. right-click in the Design Bar. For Import units. and click OK. and not in the library. 6 In the Save As dialog. enter SketchUp Model. Click the Sketchup file. select Preserve. For Files of type. for File name. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. or select from a list. 2 In the New Project dialog. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. visible elements. 9 In the informational dialog. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. 10 In the Name dialog. under Template file. select Auto-Detect. click Training Files.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon.rte. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. Double-click the Common folder. you create a Revit Architecture project.skp. For Layers. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click the Massing tab. click Create Mass. click OK. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. For Colors. buildings. select SketchUp Files. enter Import SketchUp. click OK. and click Save. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 4 In the New Project dialog.

such as walls. depending on the complexity of the project. 16 On the Design Bar.Center. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. Level 1 is the only choice. In a new project. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. click the Close button. click Finish Mass. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. click . ■ ■ For Positioning. select Level 1. and roofs. 14 On the View toolbar. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. For Place at level. curtain walls. select Manual .You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. Click Open. 17 In the warning dialog. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from.

that compose the building. curtain walls. for Level. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.18 Proceed to the next exercise. such as walls. select the face so that it highlights in red. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. After you create the building from the mass faces.400mm displays. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. 3 In the Type Selector. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. and on the View Control Bar. and roofs. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. verify Basic Roof: Generic . You turn their visibility off to view only the building. click Roof by Face. verify Level 2 is selected. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .

on the Options Bar. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. 6 On the Options Bar. click to display masses.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. on the View toolbar. A roof is created from the mass face. click Create Roof. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. verify that Select Multiple is selected.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. 9 On the Options Bar. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. click Create Roof. To see the new roof. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel.

■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. click Create Roof. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Roof by Face.

22 In the Type Selector. 23 On the Options Bar. select Core Face: Exterior. for Loc Line. to turn off the mass visibility in the view.200mm displays.15 On the Design Bar. click roofs that you created. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. click Modify to end the command. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. 21 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. verify Basic Wall: Generic . click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. 16 On the View toolbar.

24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Type Selector. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Curtain System by Face. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. 25 On the View toolbar. click to view only the walls and roofs.

click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 32 On the View toolbar.30 On the Options Bar. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 . 31 Using the same technique. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. click Create System. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel.

press TAB until the desired wall highlights. click Create System. and on the Options Bar. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. click Create Roof. 38 Select the mass face shown below. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. click Curtain System. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. click Roof by Face. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. and select it. select the other wall.35 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar.

and select the mass face shown below. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Camera. 42 On the View toolbar. double-click Level 1. click Wall by Face. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. click to view the building that you have created.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. specify a point to place the camera. Below the right corner of the view.

The perspective view created by the camera displays. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. to view only the walls. click your building in the view. Click the frame to display its grips. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. 48 On the View toolbar.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. roofs. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. as shown. specify a point for the camera target. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .

50 On the Options Bar. click . Click OK. for Justification. Under Grid 1 Pattern.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. click Modify. select Center. and select the left curtain system in the view. select Center. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. for Justification. Under Grid 2 Pattern.

double-click 3D View 1. and click Cancel to end the command. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click {3D}. 55 Right-click. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 63 In the Type Selector. 59 On the View toolbar. and move the roof edges as shown below. click Door. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 56 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. under 3D Views.54 Select each roof to display its grips.

64 Add doors to the building as shown below. 65 Save and close the drawing. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 .

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

A typical curtain system comprises a wall. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. and mullions. click Training Files. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. To change grids. you need to select a panel. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. grid lines. and you can change these elements individually. Like windows. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. you need to change the length of the wall. 525 . and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. you create a curtain system using the wall command. For example. you select the grid. to resize the system. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. or you can use a specific curtain system command. This affects the entire curtain system. Unlike windows. panel. Like walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To switch panel types. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall.rvt. and they are not windows.

click Wall. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor.1 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. and double-click Ground Floor. 4 In the Type Selector. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .

Creating an Entrance | 527 . 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. and double-click Southeast Isometric. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. 8 In the Project Browser.

and room bounding.11 Select the curtain system. 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. and click (Properties). top constraint. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. enter 1200. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. top and base attachments. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. using curtain grids. Click OK. For Top Offset.

15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and resize the crop boundary as shown. click Elevation. click Curtain Grid. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. and click Rename.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 18 In the Project Browser. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar.a. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. Creating an Entrance | 529 . double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. 25 On the Design Bar. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. right-click Elevation 1 . and click OK. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. under Floor Plans. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 20 In the drawing area.

29 In the Select Levels dialog.26 While pressing CTRL. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. THIRD FLOOR. click Modify. FIFTH FLOOR. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. FOURTH FLOOR. and click OK. click Curtain Grid. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. SIXTH FLOOR. Click to place another grid line. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. and SEVENTH FLOOR. one larger than the other. while pressing CTRL. 33 On the Design Bar. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. Click to create a vertical grid. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. select SECOND FLOOR. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name.

and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. Instead of using the Door command. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. click Add or Remove Segments. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. Creating an Entrance | 531 . You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. and on the Options Bar. and then select the segment above it. The two segments are removed. The segment line style changes to dashed. you add a doorway to the curtain system.Next.

38 Using the same method. 40 On the Options Bar. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . select One Segment. click Curtain Grid. 39 On the Design Bar. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. and lock them. 42 Place dimensions as shown.

47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. click in any white space to exit the editor. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. Use the following image as a guide. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 43 Delete the dimensions. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. Creating an Entrance | 533 .

These panels schedule as doors. not as curtain panels. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. 57 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. 52 On the Type Selector. This changes the graphics style of the Next. They are part of the curtain panel category. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family.Next. The panel changes to a double door. click Modify. Now. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. 55 In the Project Browser. click view. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. 56 In the Project Browser. and click Wireframe. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . on the new curtain system you added. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. . 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. 54 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl.rfa. click Training Files. double-click Entrance Elevation. under Elevations. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. The glazed panels display in blue. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. and the solid panels display in white. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. 65 On the View Control Bar.60 On the Type Selector. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. click System Panel : Solid. 61 With the panel still selected. Creating an Entrance | 535 . Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. 63 Click OK twice. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. click .

1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. click Mullion. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Entire Grid Line.68 On the File menu. 2 On the Options Bar. select Grid Line Segment. 4 On the Options Bar. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. click Save As.rvt. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress.

Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. so you remove them next. clickModify. 10 Delete the mullions below them. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. because their width reduces the size of the doors. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. however.6 On the Options Bar. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. select All Empty Segments. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. there are a few that you do not want. You are going to change some mullion joins. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them.

and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .Two mullion join controls display. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. 17 Save the file. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. you can also right-click. Finally. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. 16 In the Project Browser. 14 Click the top mullion control. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. double-click Southeast Isometric. 15 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

Curved Curtain System In this lesson. 7 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. for Top Constraint. (Arc passing through three points). click Wall. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 4 In the Type Selector. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Click OK. Finally. enter 1200. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. For Top Offset. Curved Curtain System | 539 . 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. you add a curtain system using the wall command. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system.

and then sixteenths. 14 In the Project Browser.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. Next. double-click East. under Elevations. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. You are going to use one of these snaps points. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. eighths. click Curtain Grid. you place grids on the system. Divide the halves into quarters. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

300mm. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. 16 On the Design Bar. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 . and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. to filter out all 19 Save the file. 18 In the Type Selector. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. you change some panels in the system. select the bottom layer of panels. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level.15 Zoom in to the cylinder. select Basic Wall: Generic . you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. Next. click Modify. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system.

click Finish Sketch. and click OK. and click . 4 On the Design Bar. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and on the Options Bar. 9 Select the extrusion. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Training Files. 5 On the Design Bar. for Depth. under Elevations. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. double-click Exterior. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. . click Lines. click Model Lines. 6 On the Options Bar. enter 100. clear Chain.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Project Browser.rft. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. select Glass. click . 12 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.

rfa family. 24 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). 19 In the Project Browser. and save the family as Curtain Panel . right-click. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. and return to the project file. and click Change Walls Orientation. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. select Curtain Panel .14 On the Design Bar.Pattern. All the panels change to the custom panel you created.Pattern. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. under Floor Plans.rfa.Pattern. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . 21 In the Type Selector. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . click Modify. All fourth floor panels are selected. 23 Right-click. click (Default 3D View). 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click 25 On the View toolbar. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted.

you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. 29 In the Type Selector.Solid. under Floor Plans. 30 Save the file. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 27 In the Project Browser. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. All the panels change to the solid panel. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc. All fifth floor panels are selected.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. right-click. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. select System Panel . This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. double-click FIFTH FLOOR.

rft. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . For vertical mullions. . 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Click again to specify the ending point. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. under Elevations. click Training Files. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. and enter 50 mm for the radius. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. enter 8. Select Radius. for Profile Usage. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click ■ ■ For Sides. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. click Mullion. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. select Mullion. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Lines. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. and click OK. double-click East. and select it.

27 In the Project Browser.rfa. and click Visibility. clear Fine. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. under 3D Views. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 28 On the View toolbar. it can be added as a mullion type. click Detail Component.rfa family. After the new profile is loaded. clear Coarse and Medium. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . click Modify. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Visibility. and click OK.detail. click Training Files. 19 On the Design Bar. 31 Click . double-click Southeast Isometric. click Mullion. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. click (SteeringWheels). 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. and click OK. 20 Select the detail component. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays.11 On the Design Bar.rfa. and return to the project file. click Modify. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view.

so you remove the unwanted ones. You have placed more mullions than you want. 38 On the Options Bar. 41 In the Project Browser. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click Duplicate. 36 Under Construction. for Profile. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. right-click. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. 37 Click OK twice. click Modify.32 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click GROUND FLOOR. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 43 Press DELETE. select Circular Mullion for Family. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . 40 On the Design Bar. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 33 Click Edit/New. select All Empty Segments. 44 Save the file. under Floor Plans.

click Pick Walls. and press TAB. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. double-click TOP OF ROOF. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. In this lesson. 5 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. and a ruled curtain system. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. and then apply those custom elements to the system. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. and you can click to select them all. select Defines slope. make custom curtain panels and mullions. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. a storefront system. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. All the inside faces highlight. 4 On the Design Bar. TIP To chain select all the walls. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. you learned to create a curved curtain system.

16 On the Design Bar.7 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. Click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. select Entire Grid Line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Roof Properties. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Finish Roof. click Mullion. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 9 On the Design Bar. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. enter 600. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. under 3D Views. Sloped Glazings | 549 . double-click Southeast Isometric. click Modify. 18 Save the file. 17 On the View Control Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar.

1 In the Project Browser. click Wall. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. under Floor Plans. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. and enter 2400. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 4 In the Type Selector. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .Storefront System In this exercise. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 5 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Unconnected for Height. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline.

8 Click the temporary dimension. click Modify. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. 9 On the Design Bar.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. and press ENTER. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. 10 In the Project Browser. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. double-click Southeast Isometric. 12 Select the storefront wall. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. and click . The curtain wall cuts the original wall. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. Storefront System | 551 . The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. For this wall. even if the wall height changes. This specifies an exact length for the wall. To see how the grid layout is defined. click Edit/New. enter 10200 mm. under 3D Views. which is specified in the type.

1 In the Project Browser. you find Number. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. center. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. 18 On the Options Bar. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. or end. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. see the Revit Architecture help. enter 15. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. By setting the Angle value. click Mullion. 16 Click OK. In this exercise. 20 Save the file. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. Angle. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. select All Empty Segments.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. and Offset. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. Justification. under 3D Views. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. 19 Select a curtain grid. double-click Southeast Isometric. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall.

Curtain System by Lines | 553 . 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. and highlight the model line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.3 On the View Control Bar. 6 Click the highlighted line.

A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. A panel between the 2 lines is created.8 Select the highlighted line. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. click Curtain Grid. 9 On the Design Bar. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Next. click Modify. 10 Select the panel. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and click . 11 Click OK.

Finally. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. and then eighths. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. quarters. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. embed a curtain system inside another wall. and define a ruled curtain system. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. and then eighths. 18 Save the file. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. right-click. select System Panel : Solid. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. quarters. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . 16 In the Type Selector.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system.

556 .

rvt. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. In this tutorial. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Roofs. gutters. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Roofs 15 In this lesson. In this lesson. gable. including hip. Before you can sketch the roof profile. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and soffits to the roofs that you create. In addition. and low sloped roofs. shed. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. You do not need to create the work plane. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. mansard. 557 . you learn how to add fascia. you learn to create several different types of roofs. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. click Training Files.

558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . select Name. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. and click OK. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. expand Views (all). TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. click Ref Plane. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. and so on). 5 In the Go To View dialog. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. 4 Click OK. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. centerline. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. and double-click Level 1.1 In the Project Browser. click the blue square on the witness line.

10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 .9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face.

click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Chain.Next. click Lines. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 16 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. sketch the roof profile. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections.

expand Sections (Type 1). 17 On the Tools toolbar.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. expand Views (all). Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . and double-click Section 1. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 19 On the Tools toolbar. click Modify. press CTRL. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. press TAB. and then select the exterior face of the wall. Next. The roof should resemble the following illustration. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. and select the second wall. 18 Select the edge of the roof. 21 In the Project Browser. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. click (Join/Unjoin Roof).

25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof.24 On the Options Bar. click model. click Attach for Top/Base. 26 On the View toolbar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

rvt. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. 3 In the Project Browser. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and enter 600 for Overhang. 5 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. click Pick Walls. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. expand Views (all). Next. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. verify that Defines slope is selected. m_Roofs. sketch the roof footprint.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. and click Yes. and double-click Garage Roof. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level.

7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. and on the Options Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select both slope definition lines. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Properties). under Dimensions. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. Next. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. click Modify. 14 When you see the informational dialog. click Finish Roof. and click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. 11 Press CTRL. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The Element Properties dialog is displayed. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. click the model. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. By default. 13 On the Design Bar. clear Defines slope. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. 15 On the View toolbar.

and enter 600 for Overhang. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. click Pick Walls. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. 1 In the Project Browser. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint.rvt. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. press TAB. expand Views (all). Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . When you complete the roof. clear Defines slope. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 3. 3 On the Options Bar. m_Roofs.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint.

click Lines. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the chimney opening. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 Using automatic snaps. 8 On the Options Bar. Next. Next. click (Rectangle). click Modify. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 15 On the Options bar. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 10 On the View menu. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. add new slope lines to the roof. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. select Defines Slope. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. select Defines Slope.6 Click to select all the walls. 17 When you see the informational dialog. 13 On the Options Bar.

select Defines slope. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. 3 On the Options Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all).18 On the View toolbar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. and double-click Level 2. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.rvt. click Pick Walls. m_Roofs. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and enter 600 for Overhang.

You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs .5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. and click (Pick Lines). and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. clear Defines Slope. using the following illustration for guidance. close the roof sketch. 7 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. Next. click (Trim/Extend). Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. select the left vertical slope definition line. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 9 On the Tools toolbar. click Lines. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. 11 To trim the first line segment. Next.

14 Under Constraints. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. and click OK. Next. click Modify. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. click Finish Roof. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 18 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (SteeringWheels). raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. 16 On the View toolbar. 17 On the View toolbar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. click Roof Properties.

24 Select the edge of the hip roof. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs .21 Click (SteeringWheels). The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. Next. join the two remaining walls to the roof. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 23 On the Tools toolbar. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs.

1 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Tools toolbar. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. clear Defines Slope. 6 On the Options Bar. Next. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. expand Floor Plans. click Pick Walls. select the left vertical roof line. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. press TAB. m_Roofs.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines.rvt. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. enter 0 for Overhang. 9 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 10 To trim the first line segment. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. click (Trim/Extend). 4 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). and enter 300 for Overhang. and double-click Level 2.

click (Default 3D View) to display the model. expand 3D Views. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 19 On the View toolbar. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. click 20 On the View toolbar. 16 Under Constraints. expand Views (all). 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. click Roof Properties. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. (SteeringWheels). and double-click 3D. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 13 On the Options Bar. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. click Modify. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. Next. you add a slope-defining line. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. m_Roofs. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. select Defines slope. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level.

you need to add two reference planes. click Split Walls and Lines. clear Defines Slope. and enter 600 for Offset. 7 On the Options Bar. Next.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. expand Floor Plans. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. add two new slope arrows. click Ref Plane. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . expand Views (all). 9 On the Tools menu. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. To help locate the position of each split. Before you can add slope arrows. click Slope Arrow. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 3 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. 5 On the View menu. click (Pick Lines). and double-click Level 2. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. 12 On the Options Bar. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. 14 On the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 11 On the Design Bar. Next. 4 In the Project Browser.

2 Select the gable roof over the garage. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then click OK. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. (Properties). and double-click Garage Roof.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. click Edit. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof.15 to add the second slope arrow. and click 19 Under Constraints. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. expand Views (all). you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. select both slope arrows. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. enter 500 for Rise/1000. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. 20 Under Dimensions. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise.rvt. When you sketch a hip roof. 16 Repeat steps 13 . When eave heights differ. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. select Slope for Specify. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. m_Roofs. and move the cursor to place the arrow. 18 Press CTRL. the adjacent eave heights must align. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 14 If you want to save your changes. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. 10 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. The eave lines display with a dimension. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . 6 With the two gable end lines selected.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. and click OK. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. on the File menu. select a method to align the eaves. 5 On the Options Bar. (Properties). under Dimensions. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. on the Options Bar. click Save As. click Align Eaves. select Defines Slope. When aligning eaves. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. 13 On the View toolbar. Next. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. expand Views (all). (Properties). select Level 3 for Cutoff Level.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. on the Options Bar. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it.rvt. expand Elevations. under Constraints. 3 Select the roof and. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click North. click Modify. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Training Files.

and then select Defines slope. under Dimensions. click Lines. 7 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. and select the remaining three lines. and click OK. expand Floor Plans.6 On the View toolbar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . click . click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. click (Pick Lines). 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. press TAB. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. 10 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 3. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. expand Views (all). create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. click Modify.

click Training Files. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . After you add the roof. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Save As. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. click mansard roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. on the File menu.17 On the View toolbar.rvt. you add a roof to a building shell. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system.

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. click Pick Walls. 5 In the drawing area. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Design Bar. verify that Defines slope is not selected. 4 On the Options Bar. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry.

select Steel Truss .EPDM.Insulation on Metal Deck . click Roof Properties. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 On the Design Bar.Because the walls are not continuous. for Type. and click OK. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. click (Trim/Extend).

double-click the section head to open the section view. The roof has been created. double-click Roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. under Floor Plans. In the next steps. 16 On the Options Bar. and click to select it.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. click (Draw Split Lines).

20 Using the same method. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. move the cursor horizontally to the left. 18 Move the cursor down. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs .17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. and select a point on the opposite roof line.

In this exercise. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. (Add points). You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. exact placement of the points is not important. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. 23 On the Options Bar. Next.The roof is now divided into 6 sections. on the Options Bar. You modify the points individually. click (Modify Sub-Elements).

The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. 25 Using the same method. enter -2''. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. and press ENTER. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs .24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. click (Modify Sub-Elements). for the dimension. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape.

Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. 29 On the Design Bar. enter 4''. click Modify. for Elevation. and press ENTER. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . and select all of the roof edges. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab.27 Press and hold CTRL. 31 Select the roof slab. including the interior edges of the roof regions. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. click (Properties). and on the Options Bar.

you can easily create its fascia. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. 35 Click OK 3 times. click Save As. click Edit/New. and soffits. Creating Fascia. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and Soffits on page 586. select Variable. for Structure. In some cases this type of slope is desired. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. and save the exercise file with a unique name. gutters. and Soffits In this lesson. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. The entire slab is sloped. 37 If you want to save your changes. 36 View the results in the section view. under Construction. After you create a roof. Gutters.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. and soffits in Revit Architecture. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. Creating Fascia. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. for the Thermal/Air Layer. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 32 In the Element Properties dialog. on the File menu. gutters. Gutters. click Edit. you learn how to create roof fascia. By making the insulation layer variable. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result.

click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. click (Properties).Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise.rfa. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. click Duplicate. click Training Files. 5 On the Options Bar. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 8 In the Name dialog. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. select M_Fascia-Built-Up.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. and click OK. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. and click Open. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Condominium. 3 Press CTRL. enter Built-up Fascia.rvt. under Construction. and click OK twice.

14 Proceed to the next exercise.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. Creating Gutters In this exercise. click (Properties). click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 13 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. Creating Gutters on page 588. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 2 On the Options Bar. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. c_Condominium. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

4 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. under Construction. Creating Soffits on page 590. 10 Click to place the gutter. . and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. and click OK three times. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.3 In the Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. click Edit/New. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. click in the Value field for Material. Creating Gutters | 589 .

590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. 3 On the Design Bar. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. click Pick Roofs. and double-click Roof. you learn how to place a roof soffit. expand Views.Creating Soffits In this exercise.rvt. expand Floor Plans. c_Condominium. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

6 In the Project Browser. 8 Select the roof. expand 3D Views. and then select the soffit to join them. Creating Soffits | 591 . and double-click 3D. click Finish Sketch. 5 On the Design Bar. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. expand Views (all). click Join Geometry.4 Select the roof. 7 On the Tools menu.

click Save As. on the File menu. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and save the exercise file with a unique name.9 If you want to save your changes. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. Finally. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. In the final exercise. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. 2 In the Project Units dialog. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise.rvt. under Length. select Millimeters. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. For Unit Suffix. select mm. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. 3 Under Area. 593 . Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. your values will be different. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. click Project Units. and open Common\c_Area. Click OK.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. If you are using metric units. select Square meters. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes.

right-click in the Design Bar. or 0.■ ■ ■ For Rounding. expand Floor Plans. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. click OK. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. click the Area Schemes tab. 9 Click Cancel. click the Room Calculations tab. select m2. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. 4 In the Project Units dialog. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. the system-computed height defaults to the level. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. expand Views (all). and click Room and Area. click Settings. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. select 2 decimal places. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. These schemes define spatial relationships. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. Click OK. For Unit Suffix. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. it is not necessary in this exercise.

If you select No. forming a closed loop. you must manually add these boundary lines. click Area Plan. 13 In the Project Browser. When you select Yes in this dialog. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . 12 When the informational dialog displays. To modify the area. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). Click OK. click Area. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. under Views (all). and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan.Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. rather than the area tag. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. you must select one of the reference lines. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected.

Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. 21 On the Options Bar. common areas. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. When you add area boundary lines. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). click Area Boundary. and store area. If you do not select this option. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. click Area Plan. When you pick the walls. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. you create a new area plan for rentable space. Next. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Click OK.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. you can either draw them or pick them. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model.

NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 .23 On the Design Bar. click Area. click ■ ■ . 28 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to select the area. click Modify. Select Office area for Area Type. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 25 On the Design Bar. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 27 On the Options Bar. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar.

click Modify and select the area. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. 29 On the Design Bar. Click OK. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps.■ Click OK. 32 On the Options Bar. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Office area for Area Type. 31 On the Design Bar. click Area. In the Element Properties dialog. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. click ■ ■ ■ .

Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . enter Core for Name.■ Click OK. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. 35 Add an area to the building model core. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. and select Store Area for Area Type. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. and Tenant 4 in the lower right.

and click Save. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule.rvt. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.Notice that within the two store areas. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. name the project Area-in progress. click Color Scheme Legend. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click Save. In the next exercise. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. and click to place the legend. In this exercise. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. 37 On the File menu.

click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. select Areas (Rentable). 7 Under Available fields. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click the Fields tab.3 When the dialog displays. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . select Area Type and click Add. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. under Category. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. 5 In the New Schedule dialog.

602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.9 Click OK.

You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. or both. 603 . you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. and floors. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. After you make building elements. You assign the default wall. you can specify the view to display massing elements. In this tutorial. At any time. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. If you modify a massing face. building elements. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. floors. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. you then need to update the building face. volume. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. floor. After creating mass floors. and perimeter information. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. roofs. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. curtain systems. and roofs. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model.

under Views (all). you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and cutting geometry. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Create Mass. click Training Files. sweeps.rvt. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. and click Massing. double-click Level 1. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Floor Plans.

and click OK. double-click Level 1. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. under Views (all). 10 In the Materials dialog. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. and on the Options Bar. click Lines. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. click 18 On the Options Bar. 15 On the View Control Bar. (Line). click (Default 3D View). click the value for Material. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. under Floor Plans. enter 25000. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. 8 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. click Extrusion Properties. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. select Mass (Opaque). and click . enter 1550 mm. and click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Lines. for Name. for Offset. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Constraints. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . (Pick Lines). for Extrusion End. 13 On the View toolbar. 12 On the Design Bar.

23 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. under Materials and Finishes. click Finish Sketch. click the value for Material. press TAB to highlight the entire face. for Name. double-click {3D} to see the results. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 28 On the Design Bar. TIP If necessary. double-click West. and click . for Extrusion End. select Mass (Transparent). 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. 21 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. enter 25000. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. enter 27500. under Views (all).Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. The second form is on top of the first form. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click Extrusion Properties. under Constraints. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. under Views (all). highlight the larger form. 26 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 30 In the drawing area. for Extrusion Start. select Pick a plane.

click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. 37 On the Options Bar. and click to select the line start point. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. 34 On the Options Bar. Next. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. click (Draw).31 Click to select the face. and on the Options Bar. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . click Lines. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. click (Arc passing through three points). and clear Chain. (Pick Lines). 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown.

on the Options Bar. click Lines and. 41 On the Edit toolbar. 46 On the Design Bar.TIP If you do not see this option. click (Move). 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. (Line). 45 In the Project Browser. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. click the arrow next to the drawing options. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. click Edit Top. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click East. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. click Modify. under Views (all). and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. 39 On the Design Bar. Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. and delete the vertical construction line.

50 On the Design Bar. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. click 49 Create an arc as shown. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. click (Default 3D View). you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . 54 Proceed to the next exercise. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. for Material.48 On the Options Bar. In the next exercise. 53 On the View toolbar. 52 On the Design Bar. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. click Blend Properties. (Arc passing through three points). In this exercise.

you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . select the mass. and select Chain. click Ref Plane. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. double-click Level 1. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. as shown. under Views (all). m_Massing_Start. click (Line). and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. click Lines. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. 9 On the Design Bar.rvt. 2 In the drawing area. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Using the same technique. under Floor Plans. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. 4 On the Options bar.

and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. click Extrusion Properties. 16 On the Design Bar. for Extrusion End. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. 14 Under Constraints. 17 On the View toolbar. In this exercise. click Finish Sketch. 15 Click OK. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. 13 On the Design Bar. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. on the View Control Bar. Using Swept Blends | 611 . click (Default 3D View). When sketching each extrusion. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. enter 0. snap the corners to the intersections. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises.

3 On the Design Bar. m_Massing_Start. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). ■ For the radius. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . 4 On the Options Bar. and click Lines. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. select a point below the mass elements. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. click Sketch 2D Path. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass.

From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. 11 On the Options Bar.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. verify that <By Sketch> is selected. The only way to align these elements is visually. click Profile 1. click Lines. click (Rectangle). Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. 10 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). and click Edit. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. click Finish Path. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. Using Swept Blends | 613 . 6 On the Design Bar. as shown.

as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . 15 On the Design Bar. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. 17 Using the same method. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass.13 On the Tools toolbar. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. click Profile 2. click (Align). 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. and press ESC. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. click Finish Profile.

23 On the Design Bar. click Swept Blend Properties. click <By Category>.18 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. click Finish Swept Blend. and click . 22 Click OK twice. select Mass (Transparent). 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Profile. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. Using Swept Blends | 615 .

26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . Finally. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. In this exercise. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. click Finish Mass.24 On the Design Bar. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you create new family types from a mass family file. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study.rvt. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson.

6 For Width. and click Apply. enter 15000mm. enter 11000 mm. for Width.rfa. enter 9000 mm. click Family Types. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Depth. enter 6000 mm. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. enter 18000 mm. for Depth. 8 For Width. for Depth. and for Name. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. under Other. 7 Click New. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 9 Click OK. and for Name. and click OK. 3 In the Name dialog. In this exercise. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . enter 12000 mm. click New. enter 68000 mm. enter 46000mm. and click OK. and click Apply. and click OK. for Height. for Height. for Height. 2 In the Family Types dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Apply. 5 Click New.rfa. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. enter 18000 mm.

Semi Barrel Vault. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 8 In the Type Selector. You also load other existing mass families and place them. and Triangle. under Views (all). as shown. double-click Site. under Floor Plans.rvt. click Place Mass. 1 If not already selected. 2 In the Project Browser. Arc Dome.rfa. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 6 Open the Box-Training.rfa family files. click Training Files. on the View toolbar. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model.rfa. 3 On the View Control Bar. click Training Files.rfa.

click Modify. 14 In the Type Selector. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. for the Material parameter. and on the Options Bar. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). 16 On the Design Bar. click (Element Properties). click Place Mass. select the 3 boxes. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . and click OK twice. specify Mass (Opaque). select Rotate after placement. as shown. click Modify. specify Mass (Transparent). select the triangle. 17 Press CTRL. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. click Place Mass. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 In the Type Selector.10 On the Design Bar. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. and click to place the mass. 25 In the drawing area. 21 On the Options Bar. enter 90 for Angle. 24 On the Design Bar. for the Material parameter. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 11 Select the box. and click OK twice. 23 On the Options Bar. click Modify.

and click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter. 33 On the View toolbar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. click Place Mass. click (Default 3D View). 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. for the Material parameter. and click OK twice. specify Mass (Opaque). 27 In the Element Properties dialog.26 Select the triangle. specify Mass (Transparent). 29 In the Type Selector. and click OK twice. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties).

In the next exercise. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . click (Default 3D View). click 2 On the Tools toolbar. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element.rvt file. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. (Join Geometry). In this exercise. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. you join these mass elements. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. NOTE When you join geometry.

3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. under Views (all). click (Mirror). 4 Select the triangle. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . double-click Site. on the Edit toolbar.

click (Draw). click (Default 3D View). Joining Mass Elements | 623 . and then select the triangle. (Join Geometry).8 On the Options Bar. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. for Axis. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. enter SM. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. as shown. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. 17 Press ESC to see the result.

In this exercise. click Modify. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. 1 On the Design Bar. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. (If Design Options is already selected. 2 On the Window menu.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . do not clear the check mark. you joined mass elements together. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. and select the triangle mass element. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. click (Add to Design Option Set). you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options.rvt. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design.

7 In the Type Selector. clear Curved. under Floor Plans.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. 17 In the Type Selector. 14 In the drawing area. 8 On the Options Bar. and click OK twice. click Modify. for Angle. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . select Rotate after placement. 10 On the Options Bar. double-click Site. select Sloped (primary). TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. and click (Element Properties). under Views (all). 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Place Mass. and click OK. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 5 In the Project Browser. click Place Mass. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. enter 90. for the Material parameter. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. specify Mass (Transparent).

Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 28 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Design Bar. specify Mass (Transparent). double-click {3D}. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. clear Sloped. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. double-click North. under Views (all). 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . 20 In the drawing area. under Views (all). TIP To find the correct shapes. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. While pressing CTRL. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. 23 On the View Control Bar. and click OK twice. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Modify. click (Add to Design Option Set). 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. for the Material parameter. select Curved. under Elevations.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. and click (Element Properties). under 3D Views. select the three arc domes. and watch the status bar.

32 On the Design Options toolbar. 34 Close the warning that displays. and click Close.rvt. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. click the Design Options tab. click (Design Options). you can make it the primary option. 35 On the File menu. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 31 Click the value for Design Option. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. select Curved from the Design Option menu. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. and click OK. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In this exercise. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . select Curved and. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. under Option.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Make Primary. you placed mass elements into Design Options.

6 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. 2 On the View toolbar.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you pick massing faces to create walls. click Wall by Face. double-click {3D}.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. under Views (all). select Basic Wall: Exterior . 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. click Training Files. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing .Brick on CMU. 5 In the Type Selector. and for Loc Line. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. click (Pick Faces). Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Wall Centerline. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model.

click Wall by Face. under Views (all). 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. 8 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Wall by Face. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 11 In the Project Browser.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. under Views (all). alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. under Floor Plans. 16 In the Type Selector. 9 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 3. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . double-click Level 5. click Wall by Face. 15 On the Design Bar. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. under Views (all). ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces.

double-click Level 9. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. If desired. 20 On the View Control Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Project Browser. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Views (all).18 Select all the faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry.

7 In the Mass Floors dialog. and Walls.In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. and click OK. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. double-click {3D}. under Views (all). you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Curtain Panels.rvt. Curtain Systems. and exterior surface area. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . click Modify. perimeter. 8 On the Design Bar. When you select levels. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. click Mass Floors. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. select all levels. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 4 Click OK. volume.

click Mass Floors. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. and click OK.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 13 On the Design Bar. 10 Press CTRL. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 11 On the Options Bar. select Levels 1-4. click Modify.

Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . 15 Press CTRL. The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. 16 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. click Mass Floors. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step).14 On the Options Bar. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. select Level 1.

and select Level. and click OK. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.rvt. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.In this exercise. select Mass Floor. under Category. and click Add. select Floor Area. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. 4 Using the same method. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Floor Perimeter. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. under Available fields. schedules can be created using the mass floors. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. press and hold SHIFT. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. The Floor Area. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . Floor Volume. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order).

and click OK. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. enter Retail. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. for Usage.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. select Mass: Family and Type. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. for Sort by.

Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. for Fields. expand Schedules/Quantities. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. and click Remove. After you assign usage. and click Properties. click Edit. under Scheduled fields (in order). under Other. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. 13 With Usage selected. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . 14 Select Level. select Mass: Family and Type. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. click Move Up until Usage is listed first.

17 In the Element Properties dialog. elevation. click Edit. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. 16 On the Formatting tab. and select Grand totals. for Field formatting. for Sort by. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Filter by. select Calculate totals. and in the field below. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. under Fields. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. 27 Click OK twice. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . and click OK. in the field under Filter by. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for Filter. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. 19 Click OK twice. under Other.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. click Edit. and click Properties. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. under Other. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. 23 In the Rename View dialog. select Level. and click OK. and plan views. and click Rename. enter Hotel. 24 In the Project Browser. for Then by. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. select Usage. for Filter. select Floor Area. 22 In the Project Browser. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). 18 On the Filter tab. select Usage.

and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. double-click {3D}. floor perimeter. the floor area. by level. you pick massing faces to create roofs. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. you created mass floor schedules. click Roof by Face. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. The mass floor schedules list. under Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser.In this exercise.rvt.

6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 . 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. click Create Roof. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. click Create Roof.4 In the Type Selector. select Basic Roof : Generic . 5 On the Options Bar.400mm. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. Your model should now look as shown.

select Sloped Glazing. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. select Curtain Panels. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise.8 Using the method you just learned. in the Type Selector. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. click Create Roof. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. In this exercise. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . 12 On the Options Bar. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 13 Using the same method. and Walls. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. and click OK. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. Curtain Systems. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass.

6 On the Options Bar. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 . 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Press CTRL. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm.rvt. click Curtain System by Face. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 3 In the Type Selector. click Create System.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. under Views (all). double-click {3D}.

642 | Chapter 17 Massing .7 Using the same method. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. select the blended form on the in-place mass. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes.

Creating Curtain Systems | 643 . 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. 11 Using the same method. click Create System.9 On the Options Bar. create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass).

and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family.rvt.12 Click Modify to exit the command. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. you change the size of an existing mass family. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. In this exercise. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing .

clear Curtain Panels. 3 On the Model Categories tab. and Walls. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. and click OK. Curtain Systems. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family.1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Floors. 2 On the View menu. for Width. click Visibility/Graphics. under Floor Plans. and click (Element Properties). Next. 7 On the Options Bar. double-click Site. Roofs. enter 30000. and then click OK. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . 6 On the Design Bar. clear Exclude Design Options. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. under Views (all).

12 On the View Control Bar.10 Open the 3D view to see the result. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. 11 In the Project Browser. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. In the next steps. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. double-click Level 1.

TIP To select the curtain wall. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. click (Default 3D View). 17 Select the roof as shown. you want to select the smaller one. Also. click OK. 16 On the View toolbar. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . 14 On the Options Bar. click Remake.

and click Remake. 19 Select the arc dome curtain system.18 On the Options Bar. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Remake.

Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule.rvt. In this exercise. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. 1 Open the 3D view. under Schedules/Quantities. you changed the size of an existing mass family. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing.20 In the Project Browser.

8 Click None to clear the selection. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing .Massing only. click All to select all categories. 4 Rename the view 3D . 9 Select Mass. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 6 On the Model Categories tab. 7 Clear one of the check boxes.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views.

you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. You might create the model shown. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 .In this exercise. If desired. This concludes the massing tutorial. such as columns and an extruded roof. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. to the building shell.

652 .

You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. When you make changes to a nested group. You mirror one instance of the group.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. You can also nest groups within other groups. the host group is also updated automatically. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. The new group is considered nested within the host group. you add the new model group to a previously created group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. all instances in the building model are updated. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. hotel rooms. For example. you also simplify the modification process. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. In another exercise. After you create a model group. and typical office layouts. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. In this tutorial. Creating. 653 . and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. In this exercise. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. place. you not only simplify their placement. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. or with those working on a different project. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. By grouping objects. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. Modifying. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. and modify repetitive units. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods.

2 Click in the drawing area. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). click Training Files. enter ZR.rvt. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. and double-click First Floor. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium.

3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. click (Group). 4 On the Edit toolbar. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. enter Typical Kitchen. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. and click OK. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 .

656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. select the center control for the group origin. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

expand Model. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. right-click Typical Kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. and click Create Instance. under Groups. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. 12 On the Design Bar.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. click Modify.

16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 15 On the Options Bar. click (Mirror). 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . clear Copy.14 On the Edit toolbar.

17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. click (Rotate). Creating and Placing a Group | 659 . and on the Edit toolbar.

20 On the Design Bar. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. one mirrored.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. as shown. and one rotated. click Modify. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.

rvt. and click to select it. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. press TAB to highlight the wall. you make changes to an instance of a group. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Save As. Modifying a Group | 661 . and click Save. Modifying a Group In this exercise. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair.rvt. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. When you finish editing.

). This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance.3 Click (Group Member. 8 On the Design Bar.). 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and click member to group instance. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. 4 Move the cursor over the door. and click to select the door. press TAB.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 7 Click (Group Member. press TAB. click Modify. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click to select the wall. select the element. NOTE To display an excluded element.). (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.

16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. 12 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. Modifying a Group | 663 . and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Basic Wall : Generic . click Modify. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. 13 On the Design Bar. click Door.127mm. 15 On the Options Bar. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. clear Tag on Placement. click Wall. move the cursor to the left. 10 In the Type Selector.

In edit group mode. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. move the cursor up. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. click Modify. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 23 In the drawing area. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 21 On the Options Bar. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner.17 On the Design Bar. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. click Edit Group. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group.

(Element Properties). All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click 28 For Base Offset. 26 Select the opening. 29 On the group editor toolbar. click Finish. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. you add the Typical Kitchen group. and on the Options Bar. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. click Modify. Nesting Groups | 665 . which acts as the host. Nesting Groups In this exercise. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. created in an earlier lesson. under Constraints. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. enter 2134. and click OK.25 On the Design Bar. enter 1000. for Unconnected Height. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group.

rvt. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 5 In the drawing area.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. click (Add to Group). 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. 4 On the group editor toolbar. select the Typical Kitchen group. click Edit Group. in the Project Browser. double-click First Floor. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. under Floor Plans.

9 Select the 2 bedroom group. select the wall between the folding doors. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. Nesting Groups | 667 . and each of the bifold doors. 8 In the Project Browser.6 Press TAB. click Finish. 7 On the group editor toolbar. double-click Second Floor. under Floor Plans.

In the next exercise. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. double-click First Floor. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. you add door tags to a group.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. such as text. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. such as door and window tags. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. under Floor Plans. and filled regions.rvt.

7 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. 4 On the Options Bar. click to draw a rectangular region. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. click Filled Region. and select a point below the left elevator.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 669 .

and select the text note and the filled region. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. and click OK. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. and on the Design Bar. click Modify. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 16 In the drawing area. click (Group). click Text. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 14 On the Edit toolbar. 12 Enter Tile. as shown. 9 On the Options Bar. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click to add an arc leader.

expand Detail. click Modify.18 On the Design Bar. 21 In the drawing area. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . under Floor Plans. Because the detail group contains variables. under Groups. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 22 On the Design Bar. and click Create Instance. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. double-click Second Floor. 20 In the Project Browser. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile.

you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.manner that a drawing component can be added. 3 On the Options Bar. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. click Modify. clear Leader. click Tag ➤ By Category.rvt. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. 5 On the Design Bar. double-click First Floor. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. under Floor Plans.

select Door Tags. double-click Second Floor. click (Group). Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. 8 In the Filter dialog. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 9 On the Edit toolbar. click Check None. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. and click OK. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog.7 On the Options Bar. and click OK. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. for Attached Detail Group Name. click (Filter Selection). 11 In the Project Browser.

you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. click Place Detail. When you load the group from the library into a new project. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. 16 On the Design Bar. therefore. and click OK. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. 14 On the Options Bar. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. click Modify.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog.

12 On the Design Bar. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . and click OK.rvt. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. verify that Project is selected. verify that Same as group name is selected. click Modify. and expand Model.rvt. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. A warning dialog displays. browse to the Desktop. and click Create Instance. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click Save Group. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. expand Groups. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. for Create new. and click Save. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. under Groups\Model. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. accept the default template file. In this case. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. click OK. 5 In the New Project dialog. click Desktop. 3 For File name. and click Open. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). select 2 Bedroom Unit.

and click OK. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. click Modify. 20 On the Options Bar. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. When a group is converted to a link. click Training Files. click Use Existing. verify that Attached Details is selected only.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. select the linked Revit model. 18 In the Project Browser. and the link is removed. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 17 On the Design Bar.rvt file is added as a link to the project. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. 24 In the message dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. click Remove Link. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. and on the Options Bar. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. expand Revit Links. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link.rvt. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. click Link. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. click Bind. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click OK. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. 23 In the confirmation dialog.

In the final exercises. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. Using Site Tools In this lesson. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. convert the data to a table.Site 19 In this tutorial. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. and then modify the data. you add a building pad to the site. and walkways. islands. 677 . You add property lines manually. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data.

This project file was created using the default metric template. right-click in the Design Bar. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. and double-click Site. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. you create a toposurface using two different methods. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_First_Project. click Toposurface. click Point. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. 4 On the Options Bar. and click Site. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. Using the first method. In the second part of this exercise. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface.rvt.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order.

6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. Use the following illustration as a reference. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point.

click Finish Surface. enter 1500mm. click Site Settings. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. 12000mm. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. and click OK. under Increment.8 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Settings menu. and 18000mm absolute elevations. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. Use the following illustration as a reference. 11 On the Design Bar. under Additional Contours. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 15000mm.

This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. 18 In the Project Browser. click the elevation value. click to delete it. modify the level names and elevations. enter 1000mm. under Views (all). (SteeringWheels). 15 On the View Control Bar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. click Modify. and double-click South. click (Default 3D View). click to view it at various angles. 16 On the View toolbar. 14 On the View toolbar. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . 19 On the Design Bar. Before importing the contour data. and press ENTER. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). on the Standard toolbar.

22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. 30 On the Edit menu. click Modify. select Preserve. Click Open. click Yes. Until it is exploded. double-click Site. For Colors. it is considered an import symbol. 28 On the Design Bar. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. under Floor Plans. click Pin Position. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . rename the level Basement. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. and click OK. rename the level Base Site Elevation. and press ENTER. 29 Select the imported topography. under Views (all). Verify that Current view only is not selected. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. For Layers. and press ENTER.21 Click the Level 2 text. select Specify. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. 24 In the Project Browser. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. 23 Click the Level 1 text. click Training Files. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark.

35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 34 Under Visibility. click Toposurface. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. 32 On the View menu. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. when the edges highlight. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. 36 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. clear Elevations. click Visibility/Graphics. When you select the import symbol. select it. click the Annotation Categories tab. click Modify. and click OK. clear C_INDX.31 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. and then click OK. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance.

click (SteeringWheels). you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. Adding Property Lines on page 684. 42 On the View toolbar. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. Using the second method. click Finish Surface. 39 On the Design Bar. 45 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 40 On the View toolbar. name the project Site-in progress. Using the first method. and click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. click (Default 3D View). you add property lines using two methods. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . this project file is required in its current state.

Site-in progress. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. On the Design Bar. do so before continuing. 4 On the Design Bar. Click Modify. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first.rvt. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. select Create property lines by sketching. click Lines. click Property Line. under Floor Plans. Adding Property Lines | 685 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. double-click Site. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. click Lines. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Select and delete the right vertical line.

click OK. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. select the lines. click OK. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. click Finish Sketch. select Edit Table. click 12 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. click Property Line. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. when they highlight. 6 On the Design Bar. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. and click OK.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . on the Standard toolbar. to delete them. A warning dialog is displayed. 9 In the warning dialog. add an arc line on the right. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and.

If the gap is not closed. This means there is no gap in the property lines. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. 19 In the Tags dialog. 15 Starting in Row #1. Adding Property Lines | 687 . enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. 16 Click OK.14 In the Property Lines dialog. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. click to place the property lines. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments.

Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. click the Imported Categories tab. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. In this exercise. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. you created two sets of property lines. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Visibility/Graphics. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK.dwg and click OK. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. 30 On the View Control Bar. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In the next exercise. 22 In the Tags dialog. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. this project file is required in its current state. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. click to place it. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. 23 On the View menu.rfa. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. right-click in the Design Bar. clear Leader.20 Click Load. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. 27 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Drafting. In the final step. The tags display more prominently in this view. 25 Under Visibility. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Before adding property line segment tags. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

Under Line Color. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. 10 Under Additional Contours. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. and click OK. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. Under Subcategory. under Contour Line Display. select Topography. enter the name Working Contour. 7 Click OK.0mm. click Object Styles.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. 2 On the Settings menu. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Under Range Type. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. In the Object Styles dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. select Single Value. select Dash dot. click Site Settings.rvt. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. Site-in progress. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. enter 1000. Under Line Pattern. click New. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. for Subcategory. select Working Contour. select a shade of Brown. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. 9 In the Site Settings dialog.

11 Click OK. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. The object style subcategory. In the next exercise. In this exercise. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. The next exercise requires a new training file. you create topographic subregions to define roads. parking areas. Working Contour. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. and islands. and islands. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. you create subregions in order to define roads. such as material. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. parking areas. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. 690 | Chapter 19 Site .

rvt. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 .Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. try to replicate the location and proportion. click Subregion. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. click Lines. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. Although the exact dimensions are not important. and open Metric\m_Site. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop.

click Properties. 6 In the Materials dialog. 8 On the Design Bar. click the value for Material. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. select Site .NOTE In the Metric training file. and click OK. enter Parking for Name. under Identity Data. and click OK. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . and click to open the Materials dialog. When you finish the sketch in a later step. click Finish Sketch. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes.Tarmacadam for Name. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography.

and double-click Topography Schedule. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. expand Schedules/Quantities. they display within this schedule. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. As you create new subregions. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. click Edit Boundary. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. 12 On the View Control Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps.Tarmacadam. under Floor Plans.9 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. double-click Site.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Finish Sketch. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Design Bar. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. Delete overlapping lines. click Subregion. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 20 On the View Control Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. In this training project. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. double-click Topography Schedule. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . 18 In the Project Browser. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. Within each subregion. Notice that the project area has increased. under Schedules/Quantities. click Lines.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. 17 On the View Control Bar.

Grass for Name. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. double-click Topography Schedule. and click OK. under Identity Data. select Site . click Properties. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. under Materials and Finishes. click Finish Sketch. 28 On the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. 24 On the Design Bar. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . 25 In the Element Properties dialog. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. enter Island . 26 In the Materials dialog. click the value for Material. 29 On the View Control Bar.Grass for Name. and click OK. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.23 In the upper-right parking area. 30 In the Project Browser. and click to open the Materials dialog.

Name each region Island Grass. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. click Lines. under Floor Plans. under Schedules/Quantities. and apply the material Site .31 In the Project Browser.Grass. 32 In the Project Browser. 35 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. Name the subregion Walkway. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . double-click Site. double-click Topography Schedule. 34 On the Design Bar. You must sketch each region separately. Notice that the schedule has been updated.walkway. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Subregion. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration.

If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. there is still only one toposurface. double-click Topography Schedule. 37 On the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. click Finish Sketch. 38 In the Project Browser. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. Notice that the schedule has been updated.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect.

rvt.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. When you use the grading tool. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. and click Save.rvt. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . Site tutorial-in progress. 2 Select the toposurface. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise.

6 On the Design Bar. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. under Phasing.3 On the Options Bar. A warning dialog is displayed. see the tutorial. click (Element Properties). Using Phasing on page 761. and click Select and Edit. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. select Copy Internal Points. click Graded Region. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . click Modify. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Select the topographic surface. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. and click OK. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. select Existing for Phase Created. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. 5 On the Design Bar.

The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. 10 Press DELETE.Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 700 | Chapter 19 Site .

and new. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Grading the Toposurface | 701 .Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. demolished. 11 On the View Control Bar.

specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. click Finish Surface. 19 On the View Control Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. 702 | Chapter 19 Site . 17 On the Design Bar. click Point. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. 18 On the View toolbar.13 Press DELETE. click (Default 3D View). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. click to view it at various angles. Therefore. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. and click OK. When you add a building pad. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. you can delete it. specify Existing for Phase. under Phasing. 24 On the View menu. click View Properties. 23 Select the toposurface. Only the graded topography displays. you create a building pad. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. 22 In the Element Properties dialog.20 On the View toolbar. under Phasing. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and delete it. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. this project file is required in its current state. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. only the original toposurface displays. (SteeringWheels). 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click View Properties. specify New Construction for Phase. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading.

click Lines. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . the Pick Walls command is active. click Pad. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. NOTE By default.rvt. click Finish Sketch. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. 2 On the View Control Bar. double-click Site. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. 4 On the Design Bar. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. If you have an existing building model. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. Site tutorial-in progress. under Floor Plans.

Adding Site Components on page 706. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 9 On the View toolbar. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . Notice the new building pad. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. 7 On the View Control Bar. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. this project file is required in its current state. click (Default 3D View). click (SteeringWheels). 8 On the View toolbar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch.

Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. click Parking Component. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm .rvt. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. double-click Site.Adding Site Components In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. click Modify.90 deg. and select the parking space. 3 In the Type Selector. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. under Floor Plans. 5 On the Design Bar. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Site tutorial-in progress.

8 On the View toolbar. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space.NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. click (Default 3D View). Adding Site Components | 707 . 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space.

and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. choose any tree type. double-click Site. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click (SteeringWheels). 708 | Chapter 19 Site . 12 In the Type Selector. click Site Component. Notice the new parking spaces.9 On the View toolbar. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.

In the following illustration. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 On the View toolbar. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. Adding Site Components | 709 . NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. 15 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). click (SteeringWheels).13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. under Floor Plans. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . double-click Site. this project file is required in its current state. and click Apply. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. Site tutorial-in progress. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. click Tag All Not Tagged. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. click Apply.rvt.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 On the View menu. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. click Hidden Line.

You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. outside of the site. Click up and to the left. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. In the following exercise. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. 8 On the Options Bar. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. as shown: 10 Using the same method. to position the shoulder of the leader. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. Click again to the left to position the leader.

and select the 3 spot dimensions. 11 On the Design Bar.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. 12 Press and hold CTRL. click Modify. 712 | Chapter 19 Site . 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder.

Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space.■ Clear Leader. 14 On the Design Bar. this project file is required in its current state. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . you create a parking schedule. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click Modify. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713.

click Tile. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 8 Under Fields. select Type. enter Space. 5 Under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities. click the Fields tab. Site tutorial-in progress. 9 On the Window menu. 11 On the Window menu. click Close Hidden Windows. select Mark. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Mark. select Parking for Category. 4 Under Available fields. enter Size. 13 In the Parking Schedule. and click OK. 12 In the Site plan. and under Heading. double-click Site. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. under Views (all). and click Add. number the first three spaces consecutively. 7 Under Fields. select Type. under Space. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. and under Heading.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. If necessary. and click Add. 6 Click the Formatting tab. under Floor Plans. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. The parking schedule is displayed.rvt.

the selected space highlights in the Site plan. under Space. 14 In the Parking Schedule. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 .Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. finish numbering the remaining spaces. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save.

716 .

Working in a shared project In a shared project. you specify an active workset. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. doors. All other team members can view this workset. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. The first time you activate worksets within a project. A workset is a collection of building elements. stairs. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. When you are working on a shared project. To make a workset editable. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. they cannot make changes to it. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. and click Editable. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. however. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. After the project is shared. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. select the desired workset. floors. you can select which worksets are open or closed. In this tutorial. use Element Borrowing. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. Using Worksharing. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . you must first enable Worksharing.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. You can enable Worksharing for any project. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. such as annotations and dimensions. and so on. such as walls. Elements specific to a view. called Worksharing. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. go to the Worksets dialog.

You should have at least one workset for each person. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. such as a tenant interior. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. When setting up Worksharing. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. After learning the fundamentals. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. Shared Levels and Grids. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. Experience has shown that. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members.dialog. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. Instead. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. not including the Project Standards. In a multi-story structure. In the lessons and exercises that follow. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. and View worksets. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. In most projects. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. for a typical project. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. In the next exercise. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work.

When you create a new workset. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. each team member has control over a portion of the design. designers work in teams. On this tab. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. if a workset named Interior was created. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. For example. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. When creating the new worksets. Regardless of the default setting. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets.Team member roles Typically. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. with each assigned a specific functional task. As new members create worksets for their own use. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view.

your changes propagate to the entire team. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. however. When you save to the central file. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. This makes them available to other team members. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. On the Options Bar. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. This is called “Selective Open. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. the file is saved as the central file. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. you can select which workset is active. you make that workset editable by you. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . When you save to the central file. After saving to the central file. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. you should then save to your local file. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. As you work. Generally. When you save locally (to your local file). When finished or at regular intervals. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. However. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. proceeds as usual. your changes are saved. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. Therefore. within the local file.

and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. if you know who checked out the required workset. using VPN. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. for instance. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. When working remotely. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you work no differently then you would in the office. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. you should check out the Materials workset. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. reload the latest changes from the central file. To do this. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. save to the central file. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. make any required worksets editable. In the next exercise. and then save the local file. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. and make that workset editable. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. Alternatively. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. In this situation. In this instance. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. In this conceptual exercise.

click Training Files. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. The Worksets dialog displays. and open Common\c_Worksets.rvt. 3 In the Worksets dialog. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. click Worksets. When you enable worksharing. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. Your username displays as the present owner. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. and notice all are editable by you. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. under Show. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File.

10 Enter Furniture Layout. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. and click OK. When you initially activate Worksharing. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. Only User-Created worksets should display. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. expand Floor Plans. a small number of team members are working on the building model. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. select Workset1. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. For example. ■ 5 Under Show. clear Visible by default in all views. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. Because the interior walls appear in many views. For training purposes. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. it is better to make them visible by default. a third team member is assigned furniture placement.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. you can rename the default workset. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. 16 In the drawing area. click OK. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. and Views. and double-click Level 1. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. currently named Workset1. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. imagine four users including yourself. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Worksets dialog. 9 Click New. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. 8 Click OK. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. 13 In the Rename dialog. 14 In the Worksets dialog. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. expand Views (all). 17 On the Options Bar. 12 Click Rename. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. Project Standards. In this training file. click New. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. type the name Exterior Shell. You do. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. under Identity Data. In this case. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. click . however. another is assigned the interior layout. In this simple training project. clear Families. Therefore. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1".

click . Hold Shift down to deselect an element. click Visibility/Graphics. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. under Identity Data. under Identity Data.19 Click OK. 20 Select one of the interior walls. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . select Interior Layout for Workset. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. click . click the Worksets tab. including the interior doors. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. and walls. select Interior Layout for Workset. 26 On the View menu. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click OK. 24 On the Options Bar. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 Select all of the interior elements. 21 On the Options Bar. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. 29 Click OK. stairs.

43 Click OK. under Floor Plans. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. 36 In the Element Properties dialog.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. 41 In the Worksets dialog. click the Worksets tab. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. 30 On the View menu. select all of the interior elements of the building model. 44 On the File menu. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. select Interior Layout for Workset. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. 42 On the right side of the dialog. Now that you have created the central file. 38 In the Save As dialog. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. under Identity Data. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. under Views (all). Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. click Worksets. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. 34 In the drawing area. make sure you remember the location of this central file. click Save As. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. In this exercise. click Non Editable. If any interior elements remain. click Visibility/Graphics. 35 On the Options Bar. click Close. double-click Level 2. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. 33 In the Project Browser. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. 39 Click Save. you enabled Worksharing on a project. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. click . and click OK. 32 Select Interior Layout. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . and click OK.

Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. 12 Click OK. select all the User-Created worksets. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and click Save. click Options. you create your local file. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 6 On the File menu. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. Before working on the model. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. 2 In the Open dialog. You have created a local file which is for your use only. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. and select Specify. 4 Click Open. click Save As. 11 In the Worksets dialog. If you have not yet completed the exercise. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. expand Views (all). Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. and double-click Level 1. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. 15 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. check out worksets. Next. and click OK. select Interior Layout. In this case. 7 In the Save As dialog. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 14 On the Worksets toolbar. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. select the central file. expand Floor Plans. click Open. please do so before continuing. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. and click OK. click Worksets. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. select Interior Layout for Name. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. In addition. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. make modifications to the building model. 13 On the Window menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. and select Yes for Editable. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise.

If this is selected. 18 On the Options Bar. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. click Worksets. click . however. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. 20 Under Constraints. notice the Editable Only option. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. 23 On the File menu. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. click Modify. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. Because this element is not owned by another user. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. In this case. On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. 24 Click OK. In the Worksets dialog. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. Verify that it is cleared. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. 21 On the Options Bar. you can still edit this wall. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . click . If it was owned by another user. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. 22 Click OK.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset.

click Modify. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. select Basic Wall: Interior . 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 29 In the Type Selector. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. 31 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Type Selector.126mm Partition (2-hr). 26 Delete the door. click Door. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. The precise location is not important. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. click Wall. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. add two door openings into the rooms you created. For training purposes. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. it is recommended. Borrowed Elements is selected. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. which matches the information in the Status Bar. click Save to Central. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. leave this file open in its current state. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. two users access the central file through a network connection. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. you should relinquish all worksets. and reload the latest changes. In addition. save to central. a tooltip. When working in your local file. you created your local file. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . Whenever you save. You modified the building model. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. please do so before continuing. By default. In this exercise. each user must check out worksets. checked out worksets. make elements editable. displays the workset as well as the element type. you should perform regular saves. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. At the end of a work session. In this particular case. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. Throughout the process. If you have not yet completed these exercises. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. and save locally immediately afterward.

click Options. click Worksets.rvt. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . return to the Settings dialog. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. and click OK. and select Specify. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. For training purposes. consider that person to be User 1. click Options. In addition. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. under Username. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). You now have a local copy of the project. enter User 2. and click Save. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. skip the following section. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. This is a system setting. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. and click OK. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. This file is for your use only. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. specifically sequenced. 11 On the File menu. 9 Click Open. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. instructions are staggered. User 2: Create a local file. click Open. select all the User-Created worksets. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. click Save As. and proceed to Creating a local copy. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. 15 On the File menu. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. 3 On the Settings menu. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. 12 In the Save As dialog. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. one user has already created a local file. and reset the Username to your computer login name. select the central file. 4 Click the General Tab and. and click OK. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. In the following section of this exercise. and select Yes for Editable. 7 In the Open dialog. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work.

Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . 27 On the File menu. and double-click Level 1. 17 Click OK. User 1: Check out worksets. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. If it is not open. 23 Click OK. click Save to Central. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2.” 29 Click OK. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. click Worksets. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. select the lower exterior wall. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 19 On the File menu. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration.You are now the owner of that workset. it becomes the active workset. and select Yes for Editable. open it now. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. and double-click Level 1. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. expand Floor Plans. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. If you only have one workset checked out. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. modify the building model. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. expand Views (all). 24 In the Project Browser.

When you save to central. and click OK. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. select Yes for Editable. 41 On the File menu. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. under Floor Plans. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. 42 Select Furniture Layout. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. The changes User 2 made are apparent. and click Rename. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. Click Yes. under Views (all). you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. you should create a furniture plan view. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. 45 In the Rename View dialog. click Worksets.” 39 Click OK. 44 In the Project Browser. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. 46 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Save to Central. User 1: Reload latest worksets. and click OK. Before adding any furniture. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. click Reload Latest. 33 On the File menu. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 37 On the File menu. However. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. click Save to Central. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. right-click Level 1. right-click Copy of Level 1.” 35 Click OK. 43 In the Project Browser. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. 34 In the Save to Central dialog.

200mm. rather than Families. click Modify. 53 On the File menu. Therefore. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 60 In the Rename dialog. 65 Click OK. enter Exterior Wall . and click OK. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. NOTE System families. and click inside any room. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. 50 On the View menu. click Edit/New. the Visible by default option was not selected. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. choose any desk. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. 49 On the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. 62 On the File menu. such as Wall Types. under Show. are placed under Project Standards. click Save to Central. click Reload Latest. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. select Project Standards. and click OK. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. and click Element Properties. click Component. click Save to Central. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. 63 In the Worksets dialog. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 61 Click OK 2 times.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click the Worksets tab.” 55 Click OK. click Worksets. click Rename. 48 In the Type Selector. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. 66 On the File menu. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility.

and save 69 On the File menu. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. This exercise requires two users and. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise.rvt. Checking out worksets. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. leave this file open in its current state. In the final exercise of this tutorial. 3 In the Save As dialog. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. select Save to Central. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. As each of you work. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and still have your local files open. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. select the following. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. you save the training file as a central file. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. In subsequent steps. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Save As. select Reload Latest. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Each user must have network access to the central file. Each user checked out worksets. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. 70 On the File menu. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. At the appropriate point in this exercise. modified the building model. and published their changes back to the central file. click Options.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. you need to set up your central and local files. User 1: Reload latest. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. finished the previous workset exercises. and click OK. throughout this training. click Training Files. leave this file open in its current state. and these problems are rectified. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). There are specific instructions for each user.

and click OK. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. 5 Click Save. 6 On the File menu. Next. This is the local file for User 1. and click Save. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. The central file should still be open. In addition. click Options. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. 13 In the Open dialog. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. click Options. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. 15 Click Open. select the central file. and click Save. On the Settings menu. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 8 In the Save As dialog. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. and reset the Username to your computer login name. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 18 In the Save As dialog. click Open. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 12 On the File menu. and click OK. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. return to the Settings dialog. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. 17 On the File menu. select Make this a Central File after save. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. Set the Username to User 2. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. click Save As. and select Specify. and click OK. and click OK. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. This is a system setting. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. click Options. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and click OK. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. click Save As.4 In the File Save Options dialog. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive.

31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 30 On the left exterior wall. You are now the owner of that workset. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. You are now the owner of that workset. click Worksets. 27 Under Active Workset. double-click Level 1. and then click OK. if any User-Created worksets are not open. select the Interior Layout workset. and click Editing Requests. click the File menu. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. and select Yes for Editable. At this point. and select Yes for Editable. select Exterior Shell. and click Open. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. 29 On the Options Bar. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. 22 In the Worksets dialog. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. 26 In the Worksets dialog. Afterwards. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. select Interior Layout. 24 Under Active Workset. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. and then click OK.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. verify that Editable Only is cleared. select the second window from the top. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. After you submit the request. select them. under Floor Plans. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. click Worksets. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1.

you requested permission to edit the element. click Check Now. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. and click OK. select the request submitted by User 2. A message informs you that your request has been granted. In this multi-user exercise. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. select the following. and the other user granted it. and notice the window is in the new location. click Close. select Save to Central. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. and close 39 On the File menu. In this case. 36 Click Close. 35 Click Grant. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 .34 In the Editing Requests dialog. to Local. 38 Click OK. 40 In the Save to Central dialog.

738 .

you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. At any time in the design process. In addition. The client has asked you to create various options.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. In this tutorial. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. In this particular case. Using design options. 739 . and each option set can have multiple schemes. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. After you and the client agree on the final design. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. you can have multiple sets of design options. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. For example. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client.

therefore. and delete the unwanted options from the project. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. click New. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. TIP In this exercise.rvt. In the second exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. With the second option. click Edit Selected. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. 2 In the Design Options dialog. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. make your final design decision. under Option Set. you can edit it. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. In the final exercise of this lesson.In the first exercise in this lesson. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. you set up multiple design option sets. each with multiple design options. each is constructed for interchangeability. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. the only available command is to create a new option set. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). you design each of the structural options. and click Close. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . In the left pane of the Open dialog. After you create a design option. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. click Training Files. the roof and structure systems must work together.

4 In the Project Browser. By selecting Multiple. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. select: ■ ■ ■ . the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. click Modify. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. click Column. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. click 12 On the Options Bar. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . 5 On the View menu. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. In this case. 9 On the Design Bar. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. In the following illustration. expand Floor Plans. or add a dimension string between the columns. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. and the third column centered between the two. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. add three columns. 7 In the Type Selector. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. TIP To center the middle column. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. 11 On the Edit toolbar. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter.

using the same technique.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. click . A copy of the three selected columns is added. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. 18 On the View toolbar. 17 Zoom out and. they are difficult to see in this view. Because of the size of the columns. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. When you are finished.

Next. 23 On the Design Bar. Adding a beam is a two-click process. double-click TOP OF CORE.Notice the 12 columns that you added. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. 19 In the Project Browser. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . Use the following illustration as a guide. The first click specifies the beam start point. click Modify. click Beam. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. you add the beams that span the columns. under Floor Plans. select Round Bar : 50mm. Zoom in on the upper right column. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. 21 In the Type Selector. and click at its center to set the beam start point. The second click specifies the end of the beam. In it.

744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . move down to the next set of columns. zoom into the left column. 30 On the View toolbar. select: ■ ■ ■ .25 On the Edit toolbar. 28 Zoom out. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. click . This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. and select the center of the column to add a copy. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. and click the center point. click 26 On the Options Bar.

enter Brackets for New. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 34 In the Design Options dialog. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. under Option. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. enter Roofing for New.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. click Rename. and click OK. 32 In the Design Options dialog. under Option. enter Structure for New. 36 In the Rename dialog. 37 Select Option 2 and. click New. 38 In the Rename dialog. not a new option set. under Option Set. 40 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. click New. and click OK. 33 Click Finish Editing. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. under Option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 43 In the Rename dialog. 41 Under Option Set. click Rename. click Rename. There should now be two roofing design options. and click OK. and click OK. select Option 1 (primary). name the option Louvers. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. click Rename. click New. 46 Under Option. 45 Under Roofing. enter Beam for New. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . 42 Select Option Set 1 and. and click OK. under Option. under Option Set.

select Option 2. under Structure. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. select Edit Selected. click Rename. 51 Under Edit. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. you create the second design option. double-click ROOF TERRACE. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. 52 Click Close. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. 48 Under Option. This allows you to more easily manage the project.47 Under Roofing. select Beam. Under Now Editing. name the option Sunscreen. under Floor Plans. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . When finished. it will resemble the following illustration. 53 In the Project Browser. 50 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK.

The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. select M_Roof Beam. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. 56 In the Type Selector. click Align. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. Refer to the following illustration. 58 On the Tools menu.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. The second click represents the plane that is moved. click Component.

60 After aligning the beam. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. The second click represents the move end point. 62 Select the beam and. The first click sets the move start point. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 61 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. Click to indicate the end point of the move. on the Edit toolbar.

Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . m_Urban_House-in progress. you need this file in its current state. click Finish Editing. 68 In the Design Options dialog. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. 67 On the Tools menu. 70 On the File menu. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. Notice that even before you close the dialog. 66 On the View toolbar. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. which is visible by default. click Save As. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click . and click Save. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. name the file.rvt. 69 Click Close.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam.

Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. do so now. expand Floor Plans. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. expand Views (all). 6 In the Project Browser. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. click Component. 5 Click Close.rvt. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. 2 On the Tools menu. you design each of the roofing options.In this exercise. each with multiple design options to pick from. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 3 In the Design Options dialog. click Edit Selected. delete them after the rafter is in place. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. Under Now Editing. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. 4 Under Edit. Sunscreen. With the second option. you set up multiple design option sets. 10 Referring to the following illustration. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. the other for beams. under Roofing. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. The first option. a Louver system. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. open it now. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. If you need to add dimensions. and double-click TOP OF CORE. 8 In the Type Selector. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. In the next exercise. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The second roofing system. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. select Louvers (primary). you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Constrain. 15 On the Edit menu. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. enter 11750 mm for Length. Enter 5 for Number. 13 On the Options Bar. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. and click OK. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. 16 On the Options Bar. Select 2nd for Move To. under Other. click Array. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . click Modify. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 .

and press ENTER.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. enter 990. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. when the listening dimension displays. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .

26 On the Options Bar. 25 With the louver still selected. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. and select the louver you just placed. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. enter 5475 mm for Length. click the Edit menu. 23 On the Options Bar. and click Array. 27 For the array starting point. Select Constrain. 20 In the Type Selector. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. and click OK. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. click Modify. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . click . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Enter 34 for Number. 22 On the Design Bar. click Component. Select 2nd for Move To.

754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click . when the listening dimension displays. and press Enter. and. 29 On the View toolbar. Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. enter 300.28 Move the cursor vertically downward.

click Finish Editing. In this case. 40 On the Options Bar. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. click . 39 On the Design Bar. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. and click OK. under Roofing. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. 34 In the Project Browser. 33 Under Editing. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. expand Elevations. select Sunscreen. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. click Lines. 30 On the Tools menu. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Therefore. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. 31 In the Design Options dialog. and then click Close. and double-click West. click Edit Selected.The louver roof system is complete. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . Click OK. under Edit. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place.

This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. the top of the next column on the right. The arcs should connect. and the third point defines the arc. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. click Finish Sketch. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. click . Under Constraints. You will fix this in a later step. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. 43 On the Design Bar. Select the right arc. 41 Select the top of the left column. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. then the center arc. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. Under Constraints. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. 49 On the View toolbar. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. 46 On the Tools menu. 45 Click OK. click Properties. then you can modify it through the dimension. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . The first two points define the ends of the line. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. click Trim/Extend. 48 On the Design Bar.

you must create a named 3D view for the primary. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. Managing Design Options In this exercise. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Edit. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. do so now. 2 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. you need this file in its current state. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Managing Design Options | 757 . The first option. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. tertiary. and click Rename. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. make it part of the building model. and then click Close. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. click Finish Editing. Sunscreen. After exploring the combinations. you designed each of the roofing options. and delete the discarded design options. secondary. expand 3D Views. enter Primary Option. you select a design. a Louver system. under Views (all). You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 52 On the File menu. under 3D Views. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. In this exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. 50 On the Tools menu. click Save. 51 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. and last options. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. 4 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}. The second roofing system. and click Duplicate.The louver roof system is complete.

under 3D Views. 10 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. 9 Click OK. under Views (all). 11 On the View menu. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. and click OK. under Views (all). This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser.5 Right-click each of the copies. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click the Design Options tab. and click Rename. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Secondary Option. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. 7 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. double-click Primary Option.

under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Views (all). 18 In the Project Browser. click the Design Options tab. under 3D Views. 19 On the View menu. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. click the Design Options tab. under 3D Views. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. In this case. double-click Last Option. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 15 On the View menu. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. and click OK. Managing Design Options | 759 . all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. In your design options. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. At this point.14 In the Project Browser. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Tertiary Option.

After exploring the combinations. 27 In the alert dialog. 31 In the alert dialog. the beam option becomes part of the model. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. select Make Primary. Because the client has selected the design option. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. The set is deleted. In this exercise. 29 Select Roofing. the current primaries are no longer options. An alert is displayed. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. made it part of the building model. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations.22 On the Tools menu. but should be accepted as part of the building model. 26 Under Option Set. click Yes. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. and deleted the discarded design options. click Close. 33 In the Design Options dialog. This was the client choice for structural. 25 Select Structure. 30 Under Option Set. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Accept Primary. click Delete. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. 35 On the File menu. under Structure. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. since you no longer need them. click Yes. click Save. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. 23 In the Design Options dialog. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. double-click Primary Option. 24 Under Option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you selected a design. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. select Beam. click Delete to remove the views that used options.

This changes room definition and total building model area. You create new phases. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. complete with schedules. demolish existing walls and doors. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. You create new phases. In the second exercise. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. In the second exercise. then add new walls and doors in a different location.Project Phasing 22 In any project. and then add new building model elements. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. demolish existing construction. In the lesson and exercises that follow. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. For the client. 761 .

you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. 6 On the Options Bar.rvt. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. This means that all building model elements. click (Element Properties). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. and open Common\c_Phasing. and double-click Level 1. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. under Phasing.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. under Phasing. When you create a new project. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. 7 Click Cancel. and click OK. As you add new elements to the building model. go to the Settings menu. 4 Click Cancel. During the demolition and renovation process. click Training Files. define the units. you do not need to change the project units to metric. are visible in this view. expand Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you wish to do so. click Project Units. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. regardless of phase. In the Element Properties dialog. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. click Modify. expand Views (all). notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.

are highlighted in red.Existing.Demo. and click OK. 12 On the Options Bar. right-click Level 1. 10 On the Options Bar.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. for Phase Created. and click OK. 19 In the Project Browser. Phasing Your Model | 763 . Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. TIP If this were a multi-story building. click Modify. 11 In the Filter dialog. 20 In the Rename dialog. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. including the door tags. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. Because this is a renovation project.Existing. After you create the views. under Floor Plans.Existing. 18 In the Project Browser. all of the building model elements. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. and click Rename. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. select Existing. click . click (Filter Selection). You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. under Phasing. After you release the mouse button. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. right-click Copy of Level 1 . enter Level 1 . and click Rename. clear Door Tags. 14 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. right-click Level 1 . under Floor Plans. and click OK. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 16 In the Rename dialog. Because this is a phase-specific view. enter Level 1 . 17 Click No.

Notice that the line pattern is still gray. 28 Under Filter Name. enter Composite Plan. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . new construction occurs after existing construction. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. On a logical time line. 24 In the Project Browser. however. click the Phase Filters tab. double-click Level 1 . select Existing. Next. select Overridden. 21 In the Project Browser. and Temporary. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. 27 Click New. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. under Phasing. to which all the building model elements belong.Existing. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. under Floor Plans. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. under New. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. for Phase. In this case. Demolished.Demo. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 29 For Composite Plan. 26 In the Phasing dialog. you modify these settings. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. and click OK. Because of this time relationship. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. double-click Level 1 . You may need to zoom in to see this. Later in this exercise. There are five default phase filters. Existing. Phase status is time-dependent.

you begin demolition. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. 42 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 .Demo. 32 In the Demolished row. select a lighter blue. There are two ways to demolish an element.Existing. select Demolished. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. select red. under Floor Plans. or you can use the demolish tool. you demolish all elements hosted by it. Next. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. select the line style. 35 Click OK twice. under Floor Plans. When you demolish the host. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. its display changes to a red dashed line. 36 Using the same method. As you click each wall. click (Demolish). select the interior walls one at a time. click OK. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. 39 In the Phasing dialog.31 Under Phase Status. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. double-click Level 1 . Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. 34 In the Color dialog. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. under Cut ➤ Lines. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. Phasing Your Model | 765 . click the value for Color.

select Basic Wall: Interior . 49 On the Design Bar. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84".44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. for Phase Filter. add a long horizontal wall. 52 Open Level 1 . 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click OK. for Phase Filter. 47 In the Type Selector. 50 In the Type Selector. under Phasing. under Phasing. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. click Door. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. The demolished walls no longer display.Demo.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. 53 Open Level 1 . and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall.Existing. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. 51 Add a door leading into each room. select Show Previous + New. and click OK. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. 45 In the Element Properties dialog.

60 On the View toolbar.New.Demo. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). because the phase filter is set to Show All. which are displayed as red. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. new is shown in blue. right-click Level 1 . All elements are displayed in this view. and existing shows as half-tone. 57 In the Project Browser. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. Phasing Your Model | 767 . 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 .New. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. 59 Open Level 1 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. regardless of phase. click (Default 3D View). 62 If necessary. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. 61 On the View Control Bar. The renovated building model plan is displayed.

room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view.Existing.New. and double-click Level 1 . define the units. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. sizes. you do not need to change the project units to metric. If you wish to save this file. demolition. As the renovation process continues. 3 Open Level 1 . expand Views (all).Demo. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. All room boundaries are phase-specific. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. In this view. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . In this view. you can do so at this time. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. you can see the new walls added to the building model. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. If you wish to do so. expand Floor Plans. therefore. 2 Open Level 1 . In the next exercise. 63 Close the file. and click OK. Notice that this view is the original building model. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. click Training Files. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. You can also see that the room quantities. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. In this exercise. click Project Units. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. and new construction. the rooms change in both definition and size. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. go to the Settings menu. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly.

11 On the Design Bar. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click in each room as you move to the right. 6 Open Level 1 . notice that there are two phases defined in this project. yet they have different room numbers. 5 Click OK. 13 Open Level 1 . 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner.Existing. and maximize the view. click Room. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. click Modify. click Room.Demo. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . click Room Tag. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction.New. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 10 Open Level 1 . 9 On the Design Bar. Use the following illustration as a guide. In the Phasing dialog.

Existing. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. The two schedule views tile. click Tile. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 19 On the Window menu. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. In addition. and double-click Room Schedule .15 Using the following illustration as a guide. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. In this case. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. click Close Hidden Windows. expand Schedules/Quantities. 16 In the Project Browser. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. 20 Close the file. 17 On the Window menu. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. View phase-specific room schedules.New Construction. In this exercise. 18 Open Room Schedule .

or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. In the final lesson. and manage the links throughout the project. In these situations. 771 . performance. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. Comparison of alternatives on a site. In this tutorial. This maximizes efficiency. modify their visibility. You position the building models on the site plan.

You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. and the other is a townhouse. modify their visibility. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. You link two building models to the project.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . One building model is a condominium. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. You position the building models on the site. you open a project in which only site components have been developed.Linking Building Models In this lesson. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files.

NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. click Close. Manual .■ Auto . click Save As. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. this option will place the link at a predefined location. select the three files. and click OK. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. 4 On the File menu. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. with write permission. All three files now reside. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. and open Common\c_Site. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . This option is grayed out.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. Select c_Site. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. click Open. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. Auto .Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. and click Properties. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. click Training Files. this system is not exposed to the user. in the Model Linking folder that you created. Otherwise. however. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. c_Townhouse.rvt. Click Open. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. 2 On the File menu. right-click. ■ ■ Manual . Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. 5 On the File menu. and save the file there. RELATED See the lesson. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . you can do so. 8 Clear Read-only. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. c_Condo_Complex. click Open.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files.

If you wish to do so. you do not need to change the project units to metric. expand Views (all). 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Project Units. For Positioning. Notice the blue detail lines. 11 On the File menu. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites.Origin to Origin.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. you can go to the Settings menu. and make your changes. expand Floor Plans. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. 10 In the Project Browser. 13 Click Open. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. and double-click Level 1. select Auto .

The second click specifies the move endpoint. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 .The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. click (Move). 15 On the Edit toolbar.rvt displays in the Type Selector. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. 17 For the move endpoint. After you select it. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. The linked model moves as one object. The first click specifies the move start point. Standard move commands work with linked building models. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. The Move command requires two clicks. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. 16 For the move start point.

the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. 21 Click Open.Origin to Origin. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. For Positioning. select Auto . click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and select c_Townhouse. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .After you specify the location to move to. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. 18 On the View menu.

To rotate an object. and click to specify the end of the rotation. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. when the vertical line displays.The townhouse building model displays above the site model. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. 23 On the Edit toolbar. In this case. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. click to specify the rotation start point. you first specify the rotation start point. click (Rotate). Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it.

The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. click (Move). 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model.

Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. The first click specifies the start point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . The Copy command works much like the Move command. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. 30 For the starting point. click (Copy).The townhouse is located within its required footprint.

34 On the Options Bar.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. use the Move command to make any adjustments. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 On the Edit menu. click . 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. click (Default 3D View). if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. and click OK. click Rotate. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. under Identity data. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. for Name. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. enter Townhouse A. 37 On the View toolbar.

When you originally linked the files. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. do so before continuing. click and hold Orbit. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. 2 On the SteeringWheels. After linking the files. they were placed too low within the site topography. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you need this project file open and in this view. click (SteeringWheels). In the next exercise. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. In this exercise. click Save.38 On the File menu. In this exercise. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation.

click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. click (Align). 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. and click OK. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. and then select the plane that you want to align. In this case. To do this. expand Elevations. 3 In the Project Browser. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. you first select the plane you want to align to. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. In the steps that follow. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. when it highlights.rvt. and click to select the line. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. and click to select it. When using the Align command. and double-click South. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. Click the Revit Links tab. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project.

click Save. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. click 13 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). under Elevations. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. 14 On the SteeringWheels. 15 On the File menu. This would over-constrain the model. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. 11 Return to the South elevation view. Both townhouses should be at the proper level.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. click and hold Orbit. click (Default 3D View). 9 In the Project Browser. 12 On the View toolbar. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. double-click North.

If the Basics page is set to Custom. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. 2 On the View menu. you need this project file open and in this view. click Visibility/Graphics. select <Custom>. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. expand c_Townhouse. and the halftone settings for each linked project. When you link a file. click Custom.rvt.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. you can independently control the visibility settings. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. In this exercise. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. 10 Click OK. double-click South. under Elevations. click By Host View. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. click the Revit Links tab. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. detail level. scroll down and clear Levels.rvt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. or Custom. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. As you can see. display settings. In the next exercise. 4 Under Visibility. If you have not completed the previous exercise. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. click OK. do so before continuing. 9 Under Visibility. By linked view. 8 For Annotation Categories.

16 Under Visibility. In this case. select <Custom>. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. By selecting custom under Model Categories. under Display Settings. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. expand c_Townhouse. By default. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. and then set the detail level to coarse. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Revit Links tab. double-click Level 1. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. You can click the value for Detail Level. With linked files. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. 14 On the View menu. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 20 For c_Townhouse. on the Basics tab.rvt.rvt. select Custom. no detail level changes are required. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. click the Revit Links tab. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View.rvt. under Floor Plans. medium. or fine. 23 In the Model categories list. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. click By Host View. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . Using the Custom option. and click OK. 24 Click OK.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis.

demolished. phase. under Visibility. and phase filter of a specific link. you manage the linked files. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. there are situations. on a sloped site for instance. select c_Townhouse. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. In this case. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. With the Show All filter applied. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. this is preferable. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. existing. In most cases. However. In this case. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. In this exercise. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. 25 On the Revit Links tab. click OK. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. all new. All other components are grayed out. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. 28 Select By linked view for View range. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. click Save. click Custom for the Townhouse link. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed.rvt. you need this project file open and in this view. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. 31 On the File menu. By default. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . In the next exercise. 29 Click OK. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. 26 Under Display Settings.

The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. click Yes.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 6 At the confirmation prompt. You learn more about this in the next lesson. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. the link is maintained. In a shared coordinate environment. Notice the Loaded. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. Locations Not Saved. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. select c_Condo_Complex. The default path type is Relative. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. and Saved Path fields are read only. 4 Under Linked File. click the Revit tab. 3 Under Path Type. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. They supply information regarding the links. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. do so before continuing.rvt. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. In general. click Manage Links. 7 Click OK. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. 5 Click Unload. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates.

9 On the File menu. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. expand Revit Links. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 8 In the Project Browser. click the arrow next to the Open button. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. the link is not loaded. click Save As. However. In these cases. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. To do this.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. right-click c_Condo_Complex. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. and select Specify. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. When you initially place the link. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. and click Reload.rvt. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. In general. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. If you choose not to open that workset. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset.

project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. The host file consists primarily of site components. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . you are establishing a shared origin point. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. and the resulting project files. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. In essence. In the next lesson. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. do so before continuing. When you share coordinates between projects. When used in conjunction with model linking. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. and save it as an RVT file. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. In this exercise. name the file Site_Project. If you have not completed the previous lesson. leave the project file open in its current view. If you intend to complete the next lesson now.10 In the Save As dialog. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise.

This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. open it before continuing. 3 In the drawing area. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt.coordinates are used. click the Condo Complex. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . When you are working in the host project. Select Site_Project. As indicated in the Status Bar. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates.rvt and click Open. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. click Open. If you have closed the project. If you have not completed the lesson. 2 On the Tools menu. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. do so before continuing. and the resulting project files. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. In this case. Linking Building Models on page 772. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project.

However. Lot B.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. and Lot C. when the edges highlight. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. In this exercise. and click OK. select Location 1. These three locations can be named Lot A. If you have not completed the exercise. click to select it. this location is not saved outside of the host project. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. 5 On the Design Bar. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. but can have multiple additional locations. even though both models originate from one linked file. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . On the Status Bar. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. it is placed at a specific location. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. you need this project file open and in this view. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. do so before continuing.

a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates.2 On the Options Bar. click . 12 On the Options Bar. click Rename. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. 7 In the Rename dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. This is a one-time operation. . It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. When constraining a link to a location. click Change. under Instance Parameters. select Move instance to. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click Not Shared for Shared Location. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. 4 Under Value. and click OK. click OK. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. click Reconcile. Record the current position as a location. In the Choose Location dialog. click Not Shared for Shared Location. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. enter Lot A for New. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. under Instance Parameters. and click OK. 9 In the Select Location dialog. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared.

18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. When you create a location. select Save. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. and click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. This is a two-click process. you cannot redefine its location. The second click specifies the move endpoint. Because Lot A is currently in use. click OK. Save locations 21 On the File menu. 26 Click OK. To explicitly save a location. Record current position as. 23 Click Save Locations. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. When you release the mouse button. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. a warning displays. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. make sure Lot B is selected. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. and click OK. The first click specifies the move start point. 19 In the Select Location dialog. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. ignore the warning. and click OK. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. enter Lot B for Name. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. 30 On the Tools menu. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. click Manage Links. and the left townhouse resides at that location. and then select the townhouse project. or cancel the action. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click OK. click Duplicate. When you relocate a project. the active location position is moved. 16 Click Change.Notice the OK button is not active. click the Revit tab. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. By relocating a project. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . 15 In the Choose Location dialog. select the second option. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. Notice the OK button is still not active. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there.

NOTE In the following exercise. In this exercise. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. click Save. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. 36 On the File menu. 34 On the File menu. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. you work in one of the linked projects. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. click Close. and click OK. 33 On the Edit menu. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . select Save.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin.

Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. For Positioning. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. under Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Select c_Condo_Complex. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. click Open. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. Also. it is placed automatically within the host project. Click Open. Because this building model only has one named location. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. if other models were linked into the same host. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. The current active location is Lot A. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model.rvt file.By Shared Coordinates. double-click 1st Floor.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. In addition. do so before continuing. When opening the linked file.rvt file. 2 On the File menu. select Auto . Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. In this exercise. If you have not completed the exercises. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host.

and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. you can select Lot C if necessary. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . In this exercise. In the next exercise. and click Make Current. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click View Properties. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. click OK. you create a new location. and click OK. click Duplicate. select True North for Orientation. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. 6 Select Lot B. under Graphics. 7 Click OK. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. you manage the shared locations. enter Lot C. do so before continuing. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click Manage Place and Locations. 3 In the Name dialog. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. If you have not completed the exercises. In the host file. you need this project file open and in this view. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. and click OK. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. orient a view to true north. In this exercise. click Manage Place and Locations.

Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. Select Site_Project. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. click Open. click Close. If you have not completed the exercise. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.rvt and click Open. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. You can save the file if you wish. 10 On the File menu. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. In this exercise. do so before continuing. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. On the Options Bar.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool.

under Category. select Doors. and click Add. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . select Count. click Schedule/Quantities. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. 3 In the New Schedule dialog.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click the Fields tab. 5 Under Available fields.

13 On the File menu. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK twice. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. and click Properties. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. under Other. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. right-click Door Schedule. clear Itemize every instance. expand Schedules/Quantities. In this exercise. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. You have completed this tutorial. 14 On the File menu. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. select Family and Type for Sort by. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. 12 Select Grand totals. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . click Save.8 Click OK. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. click Close. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

and your username when using worksets. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 3 In the Options dialog. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and click OK. click the Graphics tab. you modify the system environment. click OK. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. In the first lesson. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. 8 In the New Project dialog. journal cleanup options. click Training Files.rte. Finally. click Browse. selection default options. they are not saved to project files or template files. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. which is independent of the project settings. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. select Invert background color. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. 6 In the New Project dialog. under Template file. 4 Under Colors. 11 Under Colors.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. click the value for Selection color. These settings control the graphics. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. Notice that the drawing area is black. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. 803 . you create an office template. 10 In the Options dialog. click the Graphics tab. and set it as your default template. notification preferences. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. In the second lesson.

the elements causing the error display using this color. 15 Click OK. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 19 On the Design Bar. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. click Wall. 14 Under Notifications. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 26 In the Options dialog. For Selection color. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click OK. clear Invert background color. select red. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. click No. 22 When prompted to save changes. For Tooltip assistance. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. and open Metric\m_Settings. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the Graphics tab. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 13 Click the General tab. select One hour. click Modify. select None. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 18 On the Design Bar. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .12 In the Color dialog. select yellow. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. click Modify. When an error occurs. and select the wall. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. However. click Training Files.

27 Click the General tab. 5 Under Default path for user files. under Default path for family template files. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. click Browse. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. These files are used in the software support process. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 7 In the Options dialog. click Places. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. select Normal. 3 Under Default template file. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. notice the list of library names. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. 10 In the Places dialog. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. Under Journal File Cleanup. and click Open. select your preferred Save reminder interval. However. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. click Browse. centralized. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. you specify default file locations. 4 Click Cancel. Specifying File Locations on page 805. you can start a new project with that template. For Tooltip assistance. family template files. and click Browse to select a template. This path is set automatically during the installation process. click the File Locations tab. and family libraries. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. If prompted. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. click Browse. select the folder to save your files to by default. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. TIP To view a template. 8 Click Cancel. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). 2 In the Options dialog. Your login name displays by default. do not save the changes. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . Under Username. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. such as in a large. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. including your default project template.

or loading a Revit Architecture file. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open.library names and path. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. templates. and select it as the library path. 11 In the Places dialog. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. or families. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. When you are opening. and click Open. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. saving. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and click the icon side of the field. Load. under Libraries. In the following illustration. click (Add Value). and you can create new libraries. Save. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and Import dialogs. and change the name to My Library.

9 In the text editor. and Import dialogs. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 2 In the Options dialog. 5 In the text editor. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. This path is determined during installation. and click OK twice. If you work in a large office. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. 23 Select My Library. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. view the current path. specify the new location here. 3 Under Settings. click the My Library icon. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. Load. Save. click Edit. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. and decal image files. If you want to relocate this path. click the Spelling tab. 28 Click OK. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. such as bump maps. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 24 Click 25 Click OK. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 21 Click the File Locations tab. 15 Under Library Name. enter sheetmtl-Cu. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . 22 Click Places. 19 Click Cancel. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click My Library. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click Edit. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. custom color files. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.

It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 20 Under Personal dictionary. do not save the changes. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 14 Click in the drawing area. you modify snap settings. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . In this exercise.11 In the Options dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 4 In the New Project dialog. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the Spelling tab. click default template. 2 In the New Project dialog. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the text editor. click File menu ➤ Save. work with snapping turned off. 23 In the Options dialog. As you zoom in and out within a view. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 19 Under Settings. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. click OK. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. and then click File menu ➤ Exit.rte. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. click Restore Defaults. under Template file. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 12 On the Standard toolbar. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. click Modify. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. delete sheetmtl-CU. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click Edit. If prompted. You can turn snap settings on and off. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 22 In the text editor. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click Training Files. click Browse. you modify snap increments. click OK. click OK. 18 In the Options dialog. click Text. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808.

8 In the Snaps dialog.. enter SM. and enter 500 . 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and move the cursor to the right. For example. If it does not. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. snapping reverts to the system default settings. While sketching. TIP To zoom while sketching. 7 Under Object Snaps. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. use the wheel button on your mouse. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . If you do not have a wheel button. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. zoom out until it does so. click Wall.6 Under Dimension Snaps. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. 10 On the Options Bar. click OK. such as ZO to zoom out. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. clear Chain. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu.

26 Proceed to the next lesson. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. Notice that snapping is once again active. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 21 Move the cursor downward. and click Wall. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. and specify the wall endpoint. the midpoint. and move the cursor to the right. Do not set the wall end point. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. click Modify. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 18 Enter SM. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. If you move the cursor along the wall. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. and do not save the file. 24 Click OK. and delete the value 500 . This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. it will snap to the endpoints. and the wall edges. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall.12 While sketching a generic straight wall.. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. This is the increment that you added previously.

you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create and modify materials. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. When you apply a material to an element. click Training Files. and object styles. In the steps that follow. Using these options. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . fill patterns.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. annotations. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. Finally. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Settings. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. lines.rvt. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. In the left pane of the Open dialog. save the project file with a unique name. you render a region to observe the changes.

Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point.Fieldstone material. In the Materials dialog. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. and click (Element Properties). 13 Select the lower exterior wall. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. In the steps that follow. 3 Click (Duplicate).Fieldstone.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. However. When a model element is loaded into a project. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. and click OK.Fieldstone. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. 11 Click OK. When you change properties of a render appearance. for Class. 9 Click Apply. and double-click 02 Entry Level. and select Masonry . and click OK. 2 Scroll down the materials list. Masonry . scale. 6 Click Replace. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. select Stone. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. These details will display in rendered images. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. this material provides a starting point for the new material. and texture of the material. The Render Appearance Library is a local. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library.Stone. 10 Click the Graphics tab. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. The properties describe the color. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . In the next exercise. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. read-only library for render appearances. enter Masonry . you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry .

Brick. 20 In the Materials dialog. click Edit/New. 21 Click OK three times. 16 Enter the new wall name. 26 On the View Control Bar. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . click Model Graphics Style.Fieldstone. 25 On the View toolbar. 19 On the right side of the Material field. select the rear exterior wall. 22 Select the left exterior wall. select Masonry .Fieldstone. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. click Edit. 17 For Structure. and click OK. 18 For Finish 1. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall.14 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 In the Type Selector. click (Default 3D View). click in the Material field. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. click This is the material that you created. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . Fieldstone on CMU. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 15 Click Duplicate. 23 While pressing CTRL. . and click OK.

and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. select the render region (a red rectangle). you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. When finished. click Render. In the following exercise. select Region. 31 In the Rendering dialog. 28 In the Rendering dialog. right-click the Design Bar. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. for Setting. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. select Low or Medium. click Rendering Dialog. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 32 In the Rendering dialog.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. and click Rendering. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. The rendering process begins. under Quality. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. 29 In the 3D view.

and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. m_Settings-in progress. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. Then click Render again. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns.rvt. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. 7 Under Custom. 5 Click New. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. click Show the model.rvt. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. Drafting pattern density is fixed. 33 In the Rendering dialog. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. 3 Under Pattern Type. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. click Import. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. choose Model. and clear Region. Zoom into the model. such as steel. expand Elevations. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. in the Rendering dialog. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . and double-click West. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. click Show the model. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. select Custom.

and click OK. click Edit. and for Import scale. 22 Click OK three times. 21 In the Materials dialog. select Model. for Finish 1. click OK. enter Fieldstone. click . 23 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 13 On the Options Bar. click to select a fill pattern. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click 15 For Structure. select fldstn. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog.Fieldstone material. (Element Properties). click Training Files. click Edit/New. click in the Material field. 9 Under Custom. 18 Under Surface Pattern. 10 For Name. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . click Modify. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. and click OK. enter .56. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. under Pattern Type.pat. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows.Fieldstone. In the Materials dialog. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog.

m_Settings-in progress. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . 2 On the keyboard. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. there are often multiple window types within a project.25 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). TIP If the pattern does not display. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. adjust your zoom settings as needed. and double-click 3 Windows. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. expand 3D Views. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. For example. you can set the window frame material to By Category.

click Modify. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value column. click Edit/New. and click . click (Element Properties). 5 On the Options Bar. click By Category. click Edit/New. 16 On the Design Bar. click (Element Properties). 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. for Trim Exterior Material. click in the Value column. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. . Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. and click 15 Click OK twice. 8 In the Materials dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. 11 On the Options Bar. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 14 In the Materials dialog. for Trim Exterior Material. 10 Select the arched window. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting.3 On the View Control Bar. 9 Click OK twice. click By Category (located under the materials list). under Materials and Finishes.

It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. 29 In the Materials dialog. . or keywords include the word red.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. expand Windows. and select Trim. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. select Paint.red paint. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. and click OK. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. 18 On the Model Objects tab. click OK. type red. 28 Under Shading. descriptions. 19 For Trim. click OK. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. (Duplicate). 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. for Name. select Trim. click in the Material column. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. for Class. 25 In the search field. When you render a 3D view. 23 Click Replace. enter Trim . and click OK. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. Controlling Object Styles | 819 .

select Roof Line. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Now that you have created a line pattern. m_Settings-in progress. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. for Name. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. 10 For Line Color. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.rvt. select Roofs. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click New. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. 11 For Line Pattern. select Red. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. is open with the 3D view active. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. enter Roof Line. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. (Default 3D view). under Category. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.31 On the View toolbar. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise.rvt. m_Settings-in progress. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. 7 On the View Control Bar.

Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . under 3D Views. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. 13 In the Project Browser. but not the line pattern. 14 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the line color displays in this view. double-click to Building. click Model Graphics Style.12 Click OK.

822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Plans. click Override. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. select Solid. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 20 Click OK. For Pattern. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. 22 On the Model Categories tab. under Floor Plans.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. select Blue. elevations. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select Roofs. 18 For Line Color. For Color. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. under Category. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. sections. select Roof Line. 15 In the Project Browser. double-click 03 Roof. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. select Black. select 5. for Visibility. select Roofs. 19 For Line Pattern.

29 For Name. select Level: 02 Entry Level. 33 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. click New. under Modify Subcategories. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Red. select Double dash. enter Zoning Setback. (Line). 34 On the Options Bar. Click Click (Draw). 31 Click OK. click Lines. Notice the site topography and the property lines. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. double-click Site. select Zoning Setback. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. For Line Color. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. select 2. specify the following: ■ For Plane. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. This places the line above the topography. and click OK. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection.25 Click OK twice. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . For Line Pattern.

under Floor Plans.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Expand Site. 43 Click OK. select it. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If Site is not selected. 44 On the View toolbar. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. (Default 3D View). 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. Modifying Annotations on page 825. and clear Property Lines. expand Lines. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 40 In the Project Browser. and clear Zoning Setback. double-click 02 Entry Level. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. 38 On the Model Categories tab. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. 36 On the View toolbar. and then clear Property Lines. click (Default 3D View). and clear Zoning Setback. 39 Click OK.

2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear.Imperial. click Dimension. 7 Click OK twice. You have created a new dimension style. click the default value. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. For Units. select Linear . m_Settings-in progress. select Feet and fractional inches. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. and then click outside the second wall. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. (Undo). click Duplicate. 10 On the Standard toolbar. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. To place a dimension. click another wall. for Units Format. and place a dimension on the floor plan. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. click one wall. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. Modifying Annotations | 825 . 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 4 Enter the name Linear . m_Settings-in progress. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise.Imperial and click OK.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. 5 Under Text. double-click 02 Entry Level. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. 9 In the Type Selector. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall.

notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. select the 3 window tags. scroll down to Windows. click Tag ➤ By Category. click M_Window Tag . In the steps that follow.Number. clear Leader. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. Leave M_Window Tag . click Tag All Not Tagged. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . and select the drop-down arrow that displays. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark.14 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. 16 Click Cancel. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Then press Delete. click (Element Properties). In the preview image.Number is now the assigned tag. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 Click OK. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Category. 18 In the Tags dialog. 26 On the Options Bar. 28 On the Design Bar.rfa. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . 27 On the west wall. 22 Under Loaded Tags. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . notice that the label displays 1i. 19 Click Load.Number as the assigned tag. 21 In the Tags dialog. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. click the bottom window.Number. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 24 While pressing CTRL.

you specify the project units of measurements. Specifying Units of Measurement. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. select meters squared. 2 In the Project Units dialog. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. In the first section. Unless overridden. 31 On the Design Bar. for Area. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. you modify the detail level assignments. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click the default value. 9 Under Doors and Windows. dimensions use these project settings. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Faces. notice Window Tags appears twice.Under Category. select To the nearest 100. the other displays the instance value. click the default value.Number. select 0 decimal places. In the final section. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view.Temporary Dimensions. you modify the temporary dimension settings. For Unit symbol.Temporary Dimensions. In the second section. 3 In the Format dialog. 32 On the View toolbar. and Detail Level Options | 827 .rvt. and Detail Level Options on page 827. Unless overridden. and click OK. M_Window Tag . for Length. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. 4 In the Project Units dialog. (Default 3D View). dimension values display using this setting. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. Temporary Dimensions. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. 30 Under Leader. and click OK. for Rounding. Click OK. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. Specifying Units of Measurement. verify that Create is clear. select Openings. 6 Click OK. 8 Under Walls. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. click Modify. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. m_Settings-in progress. Specifying Units of Measurement. and click OK.

Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. click Training Files. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. expand Views (all). and expand 3D Views. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. In this table.In this project. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. In this exercise. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. You do not select a view scale to move it. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. click . The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. expand Floor Plans. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 12 Click OK.

6 In the Project Browser. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. and click OK. expand Sheets (all). 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. expand each view type. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. In the Project Browser. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. and click OK.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. 5 On the Views tab. select Discipline. 2 In the Project Browser. 8 Select Phase. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . and click Apply. notice that views are grouped by phase. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . select Type/Discipline.Phase 1-Structure East Wing .

18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 13 Select Sheet Prefix. 14 In the Project Browser. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click OK. and click OK. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. 12 Click the Sheets tab. and click New. expand each sheet set. 16 Click the Views tab. under Sheets. click the Folders tab.

and view names. and open Metric\Templates. click Browse. When you create a new template based on an existing template. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. and Discipline. In that case. Whenever you create a new project or template. navigate to your preferred directory. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. you select the starting point for your office template. In the lesson that follows. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. If you want to save this file. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. 21 In the Project Browser. View Type (Family and Type). A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. Proceed to the next lesson. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. when you create a new project. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. You can choose from several templates. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. expand Complete. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. For example. dimensions styles. you create an office template. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. In this lesson. and click OK. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. click Training Files. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. and expand both Architectural and Structural. the same rules apply. levels. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. Creating an Office Template | 831 . 2 Under Template file. Creating an Office Template on page 831. under Views. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. When you create new projects. You can also save these settings in a template file. enter a unique file name. and click OK.rte template. expand 3D Views. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. and click Open.

and double-click North. weights. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. If you have additional projects open. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 6 Click OK. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. select Project template. you can select it now. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. close them. If you want to use a template other than the default. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click OK. for Create new. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. in the drawing area. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. 15 Under Create new. 13 Select the default template. you modify the project settings for your new template. select Project. click Browse. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. 14 Click Open.5 In the New Project dialog. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. For example. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 9 In the Project Browser. drag a zoom region around the level heads. 12 Under Template File. 7 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. When you create the material. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects.

it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. and scroll through the list of categories. transparency. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. or modify existing patterns. You do this by defining the render appearance. line patterns. If you change render appearance properties. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. see the previous lesson. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. You can align. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. texture. create and modify them as needed. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. and change render appearance properties. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials.During this exercise. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. 13 If necessary. When you create or modify a material. In the Object Styles dialog. Observe the materials that are already defined. see a preview of the rendered material. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. and materials for model objects. 4 Click Replace. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. you can set line weights. create new subcategories. Modifying System Settings on page 803. rotate. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. For more information. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. or refer to the online help. line colors. the changes are saved as part of the project template. and imported objects. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. 9 Click OK when finished. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. or refer to the online help. and move model patterns. TIP For more information about creating new materials. annotation objects. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. including color. specific modifications are not dictated. and similar attributes. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. For more details on modifying these settings. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. 2 Scroll down the materials list.

or line pattern as needed. and create new subcategories as needed. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. create new line subcategories. 29 Click OK. modify the line weight. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. click Duplicate. You can add and delete view scales. To see the details of a particular style. 18 For existing line categories. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 32 To modify a line pattern.15 Modify categories. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. such as section lines and dimension lines. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. and click Edit. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. and dimensions. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. 20 Click OK. 34 Click OK. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. and specify the properties. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. 19 If necessary. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . line color. tags. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. select it. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. name the style. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. select it from this list. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed.

45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. name the style. 55 Click OK. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. click Format. Volume. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. Linear. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . 42 Select the Type drop-down list. 62 Click OK. and choose a decimal symbol. and radial dimensions are modified separately. when you add a door with the tag option selected. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. and Angle settings. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. For example. To see the details of a particular style. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. and specify the properties. 46 Click OK. click Duplicate. 57 Specify the Slope option. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. 50 To load new annotation tags. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 61 Under Doors and Windows. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. 58 Click OK. In the Tags dialog. 60 Under Walls. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units.40 Click OK. and click OK. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. 53 For Length. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. angular. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. click Load. select it from this list. TIP In the drawing area. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial.

Each command is available on the Settings menu. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. 70 Click the Sheets tab. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. rename. Links to associated tutorials are provided. create new browser organization types. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. Use the table below as a checklist. To move the view scales. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. create new browser organization types. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. You can find additional information in Help. click the arrows between columns. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. or Fine. For example. rename. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. Medium. In such a case. 69 If necessary. Using the arrows between the columns. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. See Setting up If necessary. and make modifications in each area as necessary. In a typical project. 73 Click OK. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. 71 Delete. and move view scales as needed. Although these settings can be saved within a template. 65 Click OK. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. 68 Delete. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. or edit existing organization types. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. However. When you create a new view. click the Views tab. 64 Review the table. 72 If necessary. or edit existing organization types. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. The detail level is based on view scale. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials.

You can load any family or group into a template. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Depending on the intended use of this template. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. do so before starting this exercise. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. modify. For example. For example. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. If you have not completed the previous exercise. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. In the steps that follow. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. 2 In the Type Selector. you could load detail components. furniture. the section cut material. if you load every available window type. Although this is possible. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. However. and electrical fixtures.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. or use the Project Browser. If necessary. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. Although the options are endless. there are some important thoughts to consider. you can set the default contour line interval. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. In addition. or add to this selection. If this selection is satisfactory. and the poche depth. notice the list of doors already loaded. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. phase filters. title blocks. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . you may want to delete. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. click Door. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. you can set up the phases. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. you can move onto the next component type. or electrical fixtures. you do both. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties.

(Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. create. Select it. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. Click Duplicate.3 To modify. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. click Edit/New. Make modifications. Enter a name. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. click Load. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. or load a new door type. expand Families. Notice that each family category is listed. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. or modify a door. and click OK. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. click Bar. and click Open. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. click Edit/New. In the Element Properties dialog. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. Modify type properties. create. and click OK. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template.

Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. and click Delete. To load a title block. View Range. This title block is currently part of the template. you created new projects using different templates. click Load. In addition. click 12 Click Preview. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. To do so. Detail Level. you create the views required for your template. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. 11 On the Options Bar. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. right-click the component. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. and select the title block type. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. Discipline. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 13 Click OK. In this exercise.) 10 Expand the title block. load. In addition. create. (Element Properties). The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded.

and then click OK.settings of categories and subcategories. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. and click OK. double-click Site. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. and double-click Level 1. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. open the view from the Project Browser. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. 2 Under Names. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. 18 If you modified any other view templates. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. double-click South. and click OK. click Apply. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. you will first modify view templates. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Every time a new plan view is created. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . double-click Level 2. you can apply a view template to any view. and apply the appropriate template. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. under Elevations. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. 15 In the Project Browser. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. select Architectural Plan. click Apply. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. After applying the template. In this exercise. At any time. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. the view is not linked to the template in any way. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. select Site Plan. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. 11 Click Apply. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. 12 In the Project Browser. In addition. under Floor Plans. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. 4 If necessary. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. 6 Click OK.

and click Properties. right-click the view name. Blue level heads have associated plan views. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. click 29 In the Project Browser. right-click the ViewCube. under 3D Views. in the shortcut menu. in the Project Browser. review the floor plans. or delete them as needed. 20 In the Project Browser. right-click the ViewCube. under Floor Plans. and elevations. or an edge of the ViewCube. ceiling plans. Rename. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 23 To add more levels to the template. click Orient to View. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. and click Save View.Notice the level names. a face. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. right-click {3D}. 30 In the Project Browser. click Schedule/Quantities. 22 In the Project Browser. select Make Plan View. and click Rename. notice that you have the option to rename. 31 Rename the 3D View. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. 21 In the Project Browser. click Level. To orient the 3D view to another view. enter a view name. under Floor Plans. or delete this view. duplicate. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. If you want to modify view properties. If prompted. and. on the View toolbar. expand 3D Views. use the ViewCube. right-click the ViewCube. and select the desired direction. review the existing floor plans. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. To orient the 3D view to a direction. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. By default. click Orient to a Direction. Black level heads have no associated views. 27 Create additional levels as needed. If it does not display. (Default 3D View). Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. duplicate. and select the desired view. right-click Level 1. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views.

click Sheet. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. modify settings as needed.You can add schedules to a template. modify settings as needed.txt for AutoCAD. Select a view. and click Add View to Sheet. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. and click OK. expand Sheets (all). assign filters. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. On the Filter tab.txt for MicroStation). Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. After the sheet is created. click Add View. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. select and order required fields. 37 Click OK. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. and click OK. On the Appearance tab. select the category type. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. You are prompted to select a title block. On the Formatting tab. To later add a title block to a sheet. select the default title block. You can still add views to the sheet. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. 40 To add views to the sheet. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. on the View tab of the Design Bar. select the title block and delete it. select one. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. and modify their properties accordingly. Right-click the sheet name. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. in the Project Browser. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. modify settings as needed. 42 Create new sheets as needed. and click Rename. To do so. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. and click OK. When you import a DWG or DXF file. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. or exportlayersdgn. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. When scheduling. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. name the file. and click Save. These settings are retained within the project template. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. and click Save. and they become the set mappings for the project. select Save As. for example. They cannot be shared with other projects. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Click Save As. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. doors. windows. 8 In the dialog. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. For example. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. click Save As. Using shared parameters. name the file. and so on. 5 For each category. and related multi-category tags and schedules. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. and so on. name the file. You can save these mappings to a text file. therefore. When you create a multi-category schedule.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. When you import a DWG or DXF file. and click Save. project parameters. 2 For each category.

Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. 18 Under Type of Parameter. and click OK. select a group to add parameters to. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. 19 Under Group parameter under. under Groups. If this template will be used by multiple team members.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. 8 Under Parameters. click Add. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. and specify its discipline and type. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and select Shared Parameter. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. click New. 25 Click Select. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. 3 Name and save the file. and choose a shared parameter. 23 Add project parameters as needed. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. 9 Name the parameter. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. add required parameters. because each office has a unique set of needs. 22 Click OK. select a parameter value type. 21 Under Categories. 17 Under Discipline. project parameters. 5 Enter the group name. for Name. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. 11 For each parameter group. select a parameter discipline type. you may want to save the file to a network location. 6 Create as many groups as needed. select Project parameter. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. 26 Click OK. If a file already exists. enter a parameter name. 16 Under Parameter Data. click New. 14 Click Add. For each parameter group. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. 2 Click Create. 24 To add a shared project parameter. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. 10 Click OK. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can create a list of parameters. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type.

Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. Click OK. 35 For Name. and print. By creating named settings within the template. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. 5 Click Save As. click OK. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. and click Open. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. you can set options such as sheet sizes. click Schedule/Quantities. 3 Under Settings. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . and click OK. In this exercise. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. select Multi-Category. you need only select a setting. For information on creating multi-category tags. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 2 Under Printer. 34 For Category. save the file as a template. and make it your default template file. The tag is now part of the template. select the tag. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. 4 Modify the printer settings. 28 Click OK. you can load them into the template. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. and the percent of actual size. For each printer. or refer to the online help. make minor modifications if necessary. enter a name for the schedule. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. click Setup. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 6 In the New dialog. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. for Name. paper placement. By going first to the Print command. you create named print settings. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 32 Navigate to the directory. 37 When you have completed the schedule. 39 Proceed to the final exercise.

In addition. 14 Under Save as type. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. 20 Click OK. If you need to share this file with others. 24 Navigate to the template location. In this lesson. If you have a project. enter a new name for the printer. click Setup. This can provide a good starting point for a template. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and create new settings for this printer. click Save as. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. you ensure that office standards are maintained. 23 For Default template file. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 25 Click OK. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. 18 Click Browse. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. The only remaining task is to save it. and click OK. 19 Select the template. 9 In the Print dialog. Your template is complete. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 22 Click the File Locations tab. you modified settings. You can also set this template as your default template. select it. In addition.rte). modify the printer settings. select Template Files (*. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. select a different printer. Create additional settings as needed. loaded components. save it in a network location. 11 Click Close when finished. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click Open. 15 Name the template. and saved them to a template. and click Save. By investing the time to individualize your template. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. click Browse. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Open. and navigate to the location where you saved the template.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful